Planning date:

Week: INTRODUCTION
Period:

I. OBJECTIVES: By the end of the lesson SS will be able to get form of English 6 book clearly
so that they have timetable to study well.
1: Knowledge:
2: Skills:
3: Attitude: To be relirant, confident and self control.
4: Capacity: Self- control and self study., co-operative capacity, using language.
II. PREPARATION:
1: Teacher: textbook, work book, cassette & tape,
2: Students: textbook, workbook, notebook.
III. METHODS: Communicative language teaching ( CLT).
IV. PROCEDURE:
1- Greeting and checking attendance: 1’
2. Warm up: 4’
3.New lesson
I. Introduce the English 6 book-Global success: 15’
- 3 periods/ a week
- Whole the school year: 105 periods/ 35 weeks. Include 12 units. After 3 units is a
review.
- There’re 7 lessons in a unit:
Getting started
A closer look 1
A closer look 2
Communication
Skills 1
Skills 2
Looking back & project

1st term Unit 1. My new school

Unit 2. My home
Unit 3. My friends
Unit 4. My neighbourhood
Unit 5. Natural wonders of the world
Unit 6. Our Tet holidays
2nd term:
Unit 7. Television
Unit 8. Sports and games
Unit 9. Cities of the world
Unit 10. Our home in the future
Unit 11. Our greener world
Unit 12. Robots
-The middle test: after the first 3rd unit
- The final test: after finishing 6 units
2. Form of the tests:
- Languages and skills they have studies in units
II. Introducing some games and activities in the class:18’
1- Brainstorming
2- Odd one in
3- Memorizing
GV: Phuong Mai –Lesson Plan English 6 1
4- Miming
5- Who know more
6- 20 qs games
7- Chain game
8- Mutual understanding: The game is “Mutual Understanding”. One representative from
each team comes to the board without looking at the screen, listening to the other
members explaining words one by one. The one who guesses more words correctly is
the winner.
4/ Summarize: 1’
5/ Home work: 1’
- Prepare the lesson: unit 1: My new school- Getting started

GV: Phuong Mai –Lesson Plan English 6 2

Planning date:
Week: UNIT 1: MY NEW SCHOOL
Period: Lesson 1: GETTING STARTED

I. OBJECTIVES:
By the end of the lesson, students will be able to:
- have an overview about the topic “My new school”
- use the vocabulary to talk about school things.
II. LANGUAGE ANALYSIS
1. Knowledge:
* Vocabulary: places lexical items : subject (n), uniform (n), calculator (n)…
* Grammar: The simple present.
2. Skills: Listening, speaking and reading
3. Attitude: To teach SS to work hard, love their school and friends.
4. Competences: - Listening and reading to get information about the first day at school of a
student.
- Communication, self-learning capability, creative capacity, ability to use of language……
III. MATERIALS
- Grade 6 textbook, Unit 1, Getting started
- smart TV and cards, visual aids
- sachmem.vn
IV. PROCEDURES:
Warm-up: 5’
* Aim: -To activate students’ knowledge on the topic of the unit.
* Content: write names of school things. And lead in the new lesson
* Products: - Students write names of school things on the group board and how to
play the game “netwwork”
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
*Warm up: Team work Warm up: * Network:
T -Ss
- Teacher divides class into 2 teams and asks
students to write school things everyday. pen
- Students write down on the groupboard and
stick it on the board.
-The team who has more correct words is the School things
winner.
* Chatting
- Teacher asks Ss to set the context for the
listening and reading text:
- In order to know about Phong, Vy and -What is a special day?
Duy's special day. Let’s come to Unit 1 -Why is it special for you?
Lesson 1 - What makes -you remember the
most?
Presentation: 5’
* Aim: To prepare students with vocabulary related to the topic My New School;
* Content: learn some vocabularies related to the topic.
* Products: Students read and understand the meaning of vocab.
Students know how to to play the game “what and where”
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content

GV: Phuong Mai –Lesson Plan English 6 3

Pre teach vocabulary * Vocabulary
- T-Ss
- Teacher use different techniques to - calculator (n):máy tính
teach vocab (pictures, situation, - wear (v): mặc, đội
realia) - 'uniform (n): bộ đồng phục
- Follow the seven steps of teaching - smart (adj): bảnh bao, nhanh trí
vacab. - 'compass(n): com pa,la bàn
- Repeat in chorus and individually - put on (phr v): mặc vào
- 'heavy (adj): nặng
- Copy all the words
* Checking vocab: Rub out and
remember
Practice: 30’
Task 1: (5’)
* Aims: To set the context for the introductory;
To introduce the topic of the unit, the vocabulary, the sounds, and the
grammar points to be learnt.
* Content: Listen and read the conversation, answer some questions.
* Products: Students read and understand the meaning of the text.
Students know how to role play
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
* Set the sences: T-Ss
Look at the picture on page 6 Answer the questions:
a) Who are they? a) They are Phong, his Mum, Vy and Duy.
b) What is Phong doing? b) He is having breakfast.
c)Who are Vy and Duy? c) They are Phong's schoolmates.
d)Why is it a special day for them? d) Because it is their fisrt day of the new school
- We are going to listen and read a
dialogue about Phong, Vy and
Duy's special day.
Task 1: Listen and read.
Task 1: T-Ss
- Teacher plays the recording twice.
- Students listen and read.
- Teacher checks students’
prediction.
- Teacher calls 3 students to read
the conversation aloud.

Task 2: (7’)
* Aims: To have students get specific information of the text.
* Content:. Read the conversation again and tick (✔) T (True) or F (False).
* Products: Ss say the answers aloud ( pair work)
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
Task 2: T-Ss, Ss-Ss, T-Ss
- Teacher tells students to read the Task 2: Read the conversation again and tick
conversation again and work (✔) T (True) or F (False).
independently to find the answers.
GV: Phuong Mai –Lesson Plan English 6 4
Remind students to underline the Answer key:
information and correct the false 1. T
statements. 2. F (Duy is Vy’s friend)
- Teacher has students pair 3. T
compare before checking with the 4. T
whole class. 5. F ( Phong isn’t wearing a shool uniform)
- Teacher calls some students to
give the answers.
Task 3:(5’)
* Aims: To check students understanding of the conversation and help students use the
words in context
* Content:. Read the conversation again and fill in the blanks (work independently)
* Products: Student’s correct answers on the board.
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
Task 3:T-Ss, Ss-Ss Task 3: Write one word from the box in each
- Teacher has students read the gap.
conversation again, work
independently to put a suitable Answer key:
word from the box to fill in the 1. wear
gap. 2. has
- Teacher calls one student to share 3. go
his/her answer on the board. 4. uniforms
- Teacher asks students to look at 5. subjects
the board, check their mate’s
answer.

Task 4:(7’)
* Aims: To revise some words and learn some more words indicating school things
* Content:. Matching the words with the pictures (work in groups)
* Products: Students’ answers on the posters.
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
Task 4:T-Ss, Ss-Ss Task 4: Match the words with the school
things. Then listen and repeat.
- Teacher divides the class into 2
teams.
- Teacher put two sets of cards, one
includes pictures of school things
and the other includes their
names. Members from two teams
take turns and matchs the names
with the correct pictures as fast as
possible. The team matched faster
and correctly is the winner.

Task 5:(6’)
* Aims: To check students’ vocabulary and improve group work skill
* Content:. Write names of the things around the class .
* Products: Students’ answers in your notebook ( Students share with the whole
class )
GV: Phuong Mai –Lesson Plan English 6 5
* Organization:

Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content

Task 5:T-Ss, Ss-Ss
Task 5: Write names of the things you can see
- Students work in groups of four to around the class in your notebook
look around the class and write
down things they can see in the Chairs, tables, clock, school bags, board, books,
class. pen, flower pot, pencil,….
- Students may ask teacher if they
don’t know the names of the
items.
- Students share with the whole
class.

Consolidation : 3’
* Aim: To consolidate what students have learnt in the lesson.
* Content:. Vocab about school things and Read and understand content of the
conversation
* Products: Say aloud some words they remember from the lesson.
* Organization:

Teacher’s and Ss’ activities Content

- Teacher asks students to talk - Vocab about school things.
about what they have learnt in the - Read and understand content of the conversation
lesson.
- Ss work indepently
Homework: 2’
* Aim: To revise the lesson and prepare for the next lesson.
* Content: Review the lesson and prepare for the next lesson and do exersie in the
workbbook
* Products: Students’ textbook and workbook
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’ activities Content
- T reminds Ss to do homework and - Learn by heart all the new words.
prepare the new lesson. - Do exercises in the workbook.
- Think of activities students can do at school
- Prepare lesson 2 ( A closer look 1).

GV: Phuong Mai –Lesson Plan English 6 6

Planning date:
Week : UNIT 1: MY NEW SCHOOL
Period : Lesson 2: A closer look 1

I. OBJECTIVES:
By the end of the lesson, students will be able to:
- Use the lexical items related to the topic My new school;
- Use the combinations: to study, to have, to do, to play + N;
- Pronounce correctly the sounds /ɑː/ and /ʌ/.
II. LANGUAGE ANALYSIS
1.Knowledge:
* Vocab: School lexical items and practising the sound /ɑː/ and /ʌ/
* Grammar: The simple present.
2. Skills: Listening, speaking , reading and writing
3. Attitude: To teach SS to work hard, love their school and friends
4. Competences: Listening and reading to get information about the first day at school of a
student.
- Communication, self-learning capability, creative capacity, ability to use of language……
III. MATERIALS
* Preparation:
1. Teacher: Text books , pictures, planning , …
- Grade 6 textbook, Unit 1, A closer look 2
- Projector/ Pictures sets of word cards
- sachmem.vn
2. Students: Text books, notebooks, posters, ….
IV. PROCEDURES:
Warm-up: 5’
* Aim: -To activate students’ knowledge on the topic of the unit.
- To set the context for the listening and reading part.
* Content: Game : Hot seat
* Products: Ss write words exactly on the board.
* Organization
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content

* Game: Hot seat

- Teacher divides students into 2 teams.
Each team has a member standing against
the board.
- Teacher shows pictures of some activities
one by one and other members use body
language to let their team member guess the
names of the activities.
- The team with the most correct answers in
the fastest time is the winner.
- Teacher gets feedback -> Today we are
going to learn some more combinations about
school.
2. Presentation : 5’
GV: Phuong Mai –Lesson Plan English 6 7
* Aim: To enrich students’ vocabulary to talk about activities at school.
* Content: Vocabulary about school
* Products: Read and understand the maning of words
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content

Pre teach vocabulary * Vocabulary

- Teacher use different techniques to teach - science (n) : môn khoa học
vocab (pictures, situation, realia) - exercise (n/v): bài tập, tập luyện
- Follow the seven steps of teaching vacab. - history (n) : lịch sử
- Repeat in chorus and individually - lesson (n): bài học
- Copy all the words - school lunch: bữa trưa ở trường

* Checking vocab: Matching

3. Practice: 30’

Task 1: (5’)
* Aims: To revise / introduce the names of school subjects, and some nouns related to school
and school activities.
* Content: Listen and repeat the words.
* Products: Students read words exactly aloud.
* Organization
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
Task 1: T-Ss
Task 1: Listen and repeat the words.
- Teacher asks students to listen and
repeat the words.
- Teacher calls some students to read the
words aloud.
Task2: (7’)
* Aims: To teach Ss how to combine a verb and a noun to talk about school activities.
* Content: Put the words in the correct columns. (V with N)
* Products: Ss say the correct answers ( pair work).
* Organization
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
Task 2: T - Ss, Ss - Ss Task 2: Work in pairs. Put the words in Task 1 in
the correct columns.
- Teacher asks students to work in pairs *Answer key:
and use the words in Task 1 to put into
the correct columns. play do
- Students work in pairs and do the task. football homework
- Teacher calls some pairs to share their music exercise
answers with the whole class. have study
- Teacher gives feedback and corrections school English
(if necessary). lunch history
- Teacher explains which nouns go with lessons science
each verb to make meaningful names of
activities.
- Teacher asks students to work in groups
of four and add as many words into each
column as possible.
GV: Phuong Mai –Lesson Plan English 6 8
Task 3:(5’)
* Aims: To help students use the vocabulary in context.
* Content: Fill in the blanks with a suitable word
* Products: Student’s correct answers on the board.
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
Task 3:T-Ss, Ss-Ss Task 3: Put the words in the blanks.
- Teacher asks students to work
independently and put a suitable word in Answer key:
each blank. 1. homework
- Teacher allows students to share their 2. football
answers before discussing as a class. 3. lessons
- Teacher asks some students to share the 4. exercise
answers and gives feedback. 5.science
Task 4:(7’)
* Aims: To teach Ss how to pronounce the sounds /ɑː/ and /ʌ/ and practise pronouncing these
sounds in words correctly.
* Content: Understand and how to pronounce the sounds /ɑː/ and /ʌ/.
* Products: Students pronounce words exactly .
* Organization
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
* Presentation * PRONUNCIATION
(Pre-teach the sounds /ɑː/ and /ʌ/)
- Teacher introduces 2 sounds /ɑː/ and /ʌ/ Suggested answers:
to students and lets them watch a video - /ɑː/: car, start, after, party
about how to pronounce these two - /ʌ/: cut, one, country
sounds.
- T gives some words and show how to
pronounce these two sounds. Task 4: Listen and repeat. Pay attention to the
sounds /ɑː/ and /ʌ/.
Task 4:T-Ss, Ss-Ss
- Teacher asks students to listen and Key:
repeat. + /ɑː/: smart, art, carton, class.
- Students work independently. + / ʌ /: subject, study, monday, compass
Task 5:(6’)
* Aims: To help students practise the sounds /ɑː/ and /ʌ/ in sentences
* Content: Listen and repeat. Underline the words with the sounds /ɑː/ and /ʌ/.
* Products: Students’ answers in your notebook ( Students share with the whole class )
* Organization
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
Task 5:T-Ss, Ss-Ss Task 5: Listen and repeat. Underline the words
Before listening, teacher let students with the sounds /ɑː/ and /ʌ/.
discuss in pairs and find the words with
the sounds /ɑː/ and /ʌ/. Key+ Audio script:
- Teacher plays the recording for students 1 . My brother has a new compass.
to check and repeat the sentences. 2. . Our classroom is large.
-Have them work in pairs to compare their 3. They look smart on their first day at school.
answers. Check Ss'answers. 4. The art lesson starts at nine o'clock.
- Play the recording again. Let 5. . He goes out to have lunch every Sunday.
Ss listen and repeat sentence
by sentence, paying attention
GV: Phuong Mai –Lesson Plan English 6 9
to the underlined words.
3. Production : 5’
* Aim: To give students a chance to apply what they have learnt.
* Content: Game : write sentences including 2 features: school activities and one of the sounds
/ɑː/ or /ʌ/.
* Products: Students read aloud their sentences.
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’ activities Content
- Teacher asks groups to write sentences
including 2 features: school activities and * Game: Who is faster?
one of the sounds /ɑː/ or /ʌ/.
- Ss Work in groups
- Teacher asks each group to hand in their - (e.g: I usually play basketball with my brother.)
paper and checks, the group with more - I often use compass to do Math exercise.
correct sentences is the winner.
- Teacher invites the winner to read aloud
their sentences.
4. Homework: 2’
* Aim: To revise the lesson and prepare for the next lesson.
* Content: Review the lesson and prepare for the next lesson and do exersie in the workbbook
* Products: Students’ textbook and workbook
* Organization
Teacher’s and Ss’ activities Content
- To revise what they have learnt. Learn by heart all the new words.
- Rewrite the sentences into notebooks.
Find 3 more school activities that have the sound /ɑː/
or /ʌ/.
- Prepare lesson 3 ( A closer look 2)..

GV: Phuong Mai –Lesson Plan English 6 10

Planning date:
Week : UNIT 1: MY NEW SCHOOL
Period : Lesson 3: A closer look 2

I. OBJECTIVES:
By the end of the lesson, students will be able to use the present simple tense.
II. LANGUAGE ANALYSIS
1.Knowledge:
* Vocab: School lexical items
* Grammar: The simple present and adverbs of frequency
Form
S + Vinf/ V(s/es) + … .
S + don’t/ doesn’t + Vinf + … .
Do/ Does + S + Vinf + … ?
W/H + do/does + S + Vinf + … ?
2. Skills: Listening, speaking , reading and writing
3. Attitude: To teach SS to work hard, love their school and friends
4. Competences: Know how to use the present simple. Students will developed speaking and co-
operating skills.
III. MATERIALS
* Preparation:
- 1. Teacher: Grade 6 textbook, Unit 1, A closer look 2
- Projector/Pictures, sets of word cards
- Sachmem.vn
2. Students: Text books, notebooks, posters, ….
IV. PROCEDURES:
1.Warm-up: 5’
* Aim: To activate students’ prior knowledge related to the targeted grammar of present
simple tense and to increase students’ interest.
* Content: Game: Sentence puzzling ( with the simple present)
* Products: Students complete the perfect sentences on the board.
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
* Warm up (group work) Giaoandethitienganh.info
- Teacher divides the class into 4 groups. * Game: Sentence puzzling
- Teacher delivers a set of word cards which Suggested sentences:
are jumbled sentences in present simple to 1. Peter lives near his school.
each group. 2. We go to the same school.
- Students will have to work in groups to
create as many correct sentences from the 3. They have new subjects.
word cards as possible. 4. We always look smart in our
- The group with the most correct sentences uniforms
will be the winner.
2. Presentation: 10’
* Aim: To help students know and understand the use of the present simple tense.
* Content: Introduce the present simple tense.
GV: Phuong Mai –Lesson Plan English 6 11
* Products: Understand and know how to use the present simple tense
* Organization

Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content

- Lead in :Teacher draws students’
attention to the form of the sentences * Model sentences:
created in the game and asks them 1. Peter lives near his school.
whether they know the target tense.- 2. We go to the same school.
- Elicit the present simple tense

- Teacher provides or confirms the 1. THE PRESENT SIMPLE TENSE

answers and leads in the grammar focus * Form:
of the lesson: + Positive: S + Vinf/ V(s/es) + … .
+ Negative: S + don’t/ doesn’t + Vinf + … .
- Teacher gives students some time to + Interrogative: Do/ Does + S + Vinf + … ?
study the grammar box. ->Yes, S + do/does.
No, S + don’t/ doesn’t.

3. Practice: 20’
Task 1: (5’)
* Aims: To introduce the targeted grammar of the present simple tense..
* Content: Choose the correct answer A, B or C
* Products: Students say the key aloud
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
Task 1:T –Ss : Ss- Ss Task 1: Choose the correct answer A, B or C
Answer key:
- Teacher has students work 1. A
independently, look at the form and do 2. C
Exercise 1 – page 9. 3. B
- Teacher lets students work in pairs and 4. A
exchange the answers before checking 5. C
with the whole class (explain each
sentence if necessary).
- Have Ss read the Remember! box. The present simple verbs with he / she / it
Direct their attention to the present need an s / es.
simple tense form for third person
singular
Task2: (5’)
* Aims: To help students know and understand the use of the present simple tense.
* Content: Write the correct form of the verbs.
* Products: students’ correct answers on the board.
* Organization :
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
Task 2: T - Ss, Ss - Ss Task 2: Write the correct form of the verbs
- Teacher asks students to work Answer key:
independently. 1. has
- Teacher calls 1 or 2 students to write 2. Do you have
their answers on the board, checks their 3. like
answers sentence by sentence. 4. Does Vy walk
5. ride
GV: Phuong Mai –Lesson Plan English 6 12
6. go
Task 3:(5’)
* Aims: To help Ss revise some adverbs of frequency they already learnt.
* Content: Put the words in the blanks
* Products: Student read sentences aloud.
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
Task 3:T-Ss, Ss-Ss Task 3: Put the words in the blanks.

- Elicit adverbs of frequency 2. ADVERBS OF FREQUENCY

- Tell Ss to look at the two examples * Model sentences:
carefully.Then ask them about the
position of the adverbs of frequency, - We often ride our bicycles to school.
and the meaning of those.Tell them to - They don’t often go to the cinema
recall all the adverbs of frequency they *( always, usually, sometimes, rarely, never)
know. * Note: We usually place the adverb of frequency
before the main verb
Task 3 : T –Ss ; Ss- Ss Task 3 : Fill the blanks with sometimes, usually
or never.
- Teacher shows the graph and lets * Answer key:
students fill in the blanks with suitable 2. usually
adverbs of frequency: sometimes, usually 3. sometimes
or never (Exercise 3 – page 10) 5. never
* Write a sentence with one of these adverbs.
- Teacher lets students work in groups of 1. I always do my homework aftert school
four to make 5 sentences using the 5 2. He usually watches TV in the morning
adverbs of frequency above. ………………………………………………..
- Teacher calls some groups to read
aloud the answers and gives feedback.
Task 4:(5’)
* Aims: To give students opportunities to use the present simple tense with adverbs of
frequency correctly in context.
* Content: Choose the correct answer A or B to complete each sentence.
* Products: Students’ answers in their notebooks ( Students share with the whole class )
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
Task 4: T - Ss, Ss - Ss Task 4: Choose the correct answer A or B to
- Teacher has students complete complete each sentence.
Exercise 4 – page 10 independently. Answer key:
Teacher then asks students to exchange 1. B 2. A
their textbooks to check their friends’ 3. A 4. B
answers. 5. A
4:Production: 5’
* Aims: - To help students distinguish and use correctly the present simple tense.
- To improve cooperative skill.
* Content: Make questions then interview your partner.
* Products: Role play ( ask and answer correctly)
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content

Task 5: T - Ss, Ss - Ss Task 5: Work in pairs. Make questions then

GV: Phuong Mai –Lesson Plan English 6 13
interview your partner.
- Teacher has students work on the Ex. 10 pts: you/ like/ your new school
5, p. 10 in pairs. 20 pts:
- Teacher checks the answers by playing Q1: you/ often/ ride your bicycle/ to school
a game. Teacher divides students into 2 Q2: you/ sometimes/ study in the school library
teams, 2 students in each team choose Q3: your friends/ always/ go to school/ with you
a set of questions (which are the Q4: you/ usually/ do homework/ after school
questions 1-5 in 30 pts: How often/ your mother/ pick you up/
Ex. 5, p. 10). Teacher may add more school
questions if necessary) then interview * Answer key:
each other. The team with higher score 1. Do you like your new school?
is the winner. 2. Do you often ride your bicycle to school?
3. Do you sometimes study in the school library?
4. Do your friends usually go to school with you?
5. Do you usually do your homework after school?
How often does your mother pick you up from
school?
5. Consolidation: 3’
* Aim: To consolidate what students have learnt in the lesson.
* Content:. Summarize the main content of the lesson
* Products: Students say what they have learnt in the lesson
* Organization
Teacher’s and Ss’ activities Content
Teacher asks students to talk about what -The simple present
they have learnt in the lesson - adverbs of frequency
4. Homework: 2’
* Aim: To revise the knowledge that students have gained in this lesson.
* Content: Review the lesson and prepare for the next lesson and do exersie in the workbbook
* Products: Students’ textbook and workbook
* Organization
Teacher’s and Ss’ activities Content
- T reminds Ss to do homework and - Make 5 sentences in the present simple tense,
prepare the new lesson. using adverbs of frequency.
- Prepare lesson 4 ( communication)

GV: Phuong Mai –Lesson Plan English 6 14

Planning date:
Week : UNIT 1: MY NEW SCHOOL
Period : Lesson 4 : Communication

I. OBJECTIVES:
By the end of the lesson, students will be able to:
- Use the lexical items related to the topic My new school;
- Know how to introduce someone;
- Ask appropriate questions when making friends at school;
- Know what good qualities a good friend should have.
II. LANGUAGE ANALYSIS
1.Knowledge: -
- Talk about school activities, subjects, their friends and know how to introduce someone;
* Vocab: School lexical items
* Grammar: The simple present.
2. Skills: Speaking , reading and writing
3. Attitude: To teach SS to work hard, love their school and friends
4. Competences : develop their language skills, as well as learn about Vietnamese culture and
other cultures.
III. MATERIALS
* Preparation:
1. Teacher:
- Grade 6 textbook, Unit 1, Communication
- Pictures/ Projector
- sachmem.vn
2. Students: Text books, notebooks, posters, ….
IV. PROCEDURES:
1.Warm-up: 5’
* Aim: To introduce the topic..
* Content: Students to talk about what he/she does everyday ; some questions about
making friends
* Products: Student s presents in front of the class; students’ correct answers.
* Organization
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
* Warm up Team work * Game: : Chatting
- Teacher gets 2 students to talk about what - Hello, I am..... Everyday I.....
he/she does everyday
- Teacher makes remarks and give the two - Whole class listen, find out mistakes (if
students marks. any)
* Interviewing:
T: Pretends to be a new classmate; 1/ How do you often make friends ?
lets ss ask questions to make friend 2/. What do you often say when you first
GV: Phuong Mai –Lesson Plan English 6 15
Ss: Ask questions. meet a new friends ?
T: Comments on the student's questions then 3. What questions do you often make ?
leads into new lesson: "We will learn what to
ask a new friend".
2. Presentation: 10’
* EVERYDAY ENGLISH
* Aim: - To prepare students with vocabulary related to the topic My New School;
- To introduce the structure of introducing someone.
* Content: some new words about related to the lesson.
* Products: Read and understand the meaning of words.
* Organization
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
- Pre teach vocabulary 1. VOCABULARY:
- Teacher use different techniques to teach - share (v) : chia sẻ
vocab (pictures, situation, realia) - classmate (n): bạn cùng lớp
- Repeat in chorus and individually - keep (v): giữ, giữ gìn
- Copy all the words - secret (n) : bí mật

* Checking vocab: rub out and remmeber

- Pre structure 2. SENTENCE STRUCTURE:
INTRODUCING SOMEONE
Task 1:T –Ss : Ss- Ss
- Teacher lets students listen and read the Task 1: Listen and read the dialogue.
dialogue, asks them what the characters say This is … .
when they first meet someone. Nice to meet/ see you.
- Teacher calls some students to share their Nice to meet/ see you, too
opinions.
- Teacher gives more explanations and writes
down the structure of introducing someone.
3. Practice: 20’
Task 2:
* Aims: To practice the structure of introducing someone.
* Content: Practise introducing a friend to someone.
* Products: role play and practice in front of the class fluently.
* Organization
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
Task 2:T –Ss : Ss- Ss Task 2: Work in groups. Practise
introducing a friend to someone.
- Teacher asks students to work in groups
of four, introducing themselves to the Example:
group members, using structures above. Thien: Huy, this is Huong, my new friend.
- Teacher calls some students to introduce Huy: Hi, Huong . Nice to meet you.
their new friends to the whole class. Huong: Hi, Huy. Nice to meet you, too.
- Teacher gives feedback and corrections
(if necessary).
Task3: NEW FRIENDS AT SCHOOL
* Aims: To identify questions people should ask when making new friendsat school.
* Content: Read and tick the questions you think are suitable to ask a new friend at school.
* Products: Discuss the questions in groups and tick the suitable questions.
* Organization
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
GV: Phuong Mai –Lesson Plan English 6 16
Task 3: T - Ss, Ss – Ss Task 3: Read and tick the questions you
think are suitable to ask a new friend at
- Ask Ss to read and tickthe questions school.
individually.Then let them discuss the 1. Are you from around here?
questions in groups 2. Do you like music?
4 . What is your favourite subject at
school?
6. Do you play football?
- T asks them to add 2 more questions to 7. How do you go to school every day?
the list. * Suggested answer:
- Teacher checks with the whole class. 1. What’s your name?
2. Where do you live?
3. Do you like EL?
4. What’s your telephone number?
Task 4
* Aims: - To identify qualities of a good friend
-To help Ss revise yes / no questions with the present simple
* Content:. Friendship quiz. ( some questions about a good friend)
* Products: Students’ correct answers. (work independently)
* Organization
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content

- Students work independently and do the Task 4: Friendship quiz.

quiz in Ex. 4, p. 11
E.g. friendly, generous,helpful,
cheerful, etc.)
4. Production: 5’
* Aims: To apply the knowledge they have learnt in this lesson.
* Content: interview the others, use the questions “ How is a good friend?”
* Products: Students ask and answer exactly ( group work )
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
Task 4: T - Ss, Ss - Ss Task 5: Work in groups. Take turns to
- Teacher ask students to move to places of interview the others, use the questions
classmates they haven’t got aquainted above.
yet, form a new group and interview the
new mates, then give feedback on their (e.g. Friends are forever.)
mates.
- Teacher calls some groups to make
models

5. Consolidation: 3’
* Aims: To consolidate what students have learnt in the lesson.
* Content: summarize the main content in the lesson.
* Products: Students say what they have learnt in the lesson.
* Organization

Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content

Teacher asks students to talk about what - some new words
they have learnt in the lesson. - Introducing someone
- How is a good friend.?
GV: Phuong Mai –Lesson Plan English 6 17
6. Homework : 2’
* Aim: To revise the knowledge that students have gained in this lesson.
* Content: Review the lesson and prepare for the next lesson and do exersie in the
workbook.
* Products: Students’ textbook and workbook.
* Organization
Teacher’s and Ss’ activities Content
- T reminds Ss to do homework and - Write down the results and feedback of the
prepare the new lesson. previous interviews.
- Prepare lesson 5 ( skills 1)

Planning date:
Week : UNIT 1: MY NEW SCHOOL
Period: Lesson 5 : Skills1

I. OBJECTIVES:
By the end of the lesson, students will be able to:
- Develop reading skill for general and specific information about schools;
- Talk about different types of school;
- Talk about things they like and don’t like at school and the reasons for that.
II. LANGUAGE ANALYSIS
1.Knowledge:
* Vocab: boarding school (n) playground (n) international (adj),….
* Grammar: The simple present.
2. Skills: Speaking , reading
3. Attitude: To teach SS to work hard, love their school and friends.
4. Competences : develop their language skills, Ask and answer questions about school .activities
B. Preparation:
III. MATERIALS
* Preparation:
1. Teacher
- Grade 6 textbook, Unit 1, Skills 1
- Pictures/ Projector
- sachmem.vn
2. Students: Text books, notebooks, posters, ….
IV. PROCEDURES :
1.Warm-up : 5’
* Aim: To introduce the topic of reading.
* Content: Game : chatting ( some questions about the school).
* Products: Students say the correct answers aloud.
* Organization
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
- T- Ss * Play a game : Chatting
- Teachers asks students some 1. What’s the name of your school?
questions about Ss’ school. 2. Is your shool big or small?
- Students answer the 3. How many students and teachers are there?
questions 4. Do you like your new school? Why or why not?
- And then lead in the new
lesson.
2. Pre- reading 10’
* Aim: - To prepare students with vocabulary related to the lesson
GV: Phuong Mai –Lesson Plan English 6 18
- To lead in the reading skills. -
* Content: Some vocabularies related the lesson.
* Products: Read and understand the meaning of the words.
* Organization
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
T –Ss : * VOCABULARY:
- Pre teach vocabulary - a green field (n): đồng lúa
- Teacher use different - a mountain (n) : ngọn núi
techniques to teach vocab - computer room (n) : phòng máy tính
(pictures, situation, realia) - Join (v) : tham gia
- Repeat in chorus and - International (adj) : quốc tế
individually - Art club (n) : câu lạc bộ mĩ thuật
- Copy all the words

* Checking vocab: < what I - Reading

and where> 1. What can you see in these pictures?
2. Are these schools in the same place?
- Pre-Reading 3. Which school do you think is in Viet Nam?
- Teacher leads students Suggested answers:
into the lesson by showing 1. I can see three different schools.
pictures of 3 schools 2. No, they aren’t.
Sunrise, An Son and 3. The second school.
Dream and asks them some
questions
3. While reading : 15’
Task 1
* Aims: - To develop reading skill for general information.
- To help students understand activate their knowledge of the topic.
* Content: Read the passages and Match.
* Products: Read and say the correct answers.
* Organization
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
Task 2:T –Ss : Ss- Ss Task 1: Look at the picture and quickly read the
- Teacher asks students to passages. Match 1-3 with A-C.
open the book, read Answer key:
through the text and do Ex. 1. C - a boarding school in Sydney
1 – p. 12. 2. A - a school in Bac Giang
- Teacher calls some 3. B - . an international school
students to give the answer,
explain which sentence
give them the information.

Task 2
* Aims: To help Ss develop their reading skill for specific information (scanning).
* Content: Read the passages again and complete the sentences.
* Products: Stusents’ correct answers on the board.
* Organization
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
Task 2: T - Ss, Ss – Ss (Pair Task 2: Read the passages again and complete the
work) sentences.
- Teacher asks students to * Answer key:
GV: Phuong Mai –Lesson Plan English 6 19
read through the sentences, 1. boarding
predict what information/ 2. Sydney
what types of words they 3. mountains and green fields
have to fill in the blanks. 4. Dream School
- Teacher lets students work 5. English-speaking teachers
independently and find the
correct answer.
- Teacher lets students pair
compare before checking
with the whole class.
Task 3
* Aims: - To identify different features of each school.
* Content: Answer the questions.
* Products: Students’ correct answers on the board.
* Organization
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
- Teacher asks students to Task 3: Answer the questions.
read the questions and Suggested answers:
underline key words, 1. Sunrise is a boarding school.
reminds them to focus on 2. An Son School is in Bac Giang.
the types of information 3. Yes, there is.
they have to find (What/ 4. They join many interesting clubs.
Where/ Which school…).
- Teacher asks students to
work in pairs and find the
answer.
Teacher calls a student to
write his/her answer on the
board, then check sentence
by sentence with class
4. Pre- speaking: 5’
* Aims: To help Ss prepare ideas for the speaking activity;
* Content: Ask and answer about the school they like and say the reason.
* Products: Students ask and answer fluently in groups .
* Organization
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
Task 4: T - Ss, Ss – Ss II. Speaking
Task 4: Which school in Exercise 1 would you like to go
- Teacher asks students to to? Why/ Why not? Complete the table.
work independently and Name Reasons you like it Reasons you don’t
complete the table. of like it
- Teacher goes around and school
offers help if needed. Sunrise I can practise English It’s a boarding
with other students. school, so I can’t go
An home everyday.
Son It is in beautiful place, It is quite small and
so it has a good view. very remote, so it
I can learn English isn’t convenient to
with English-speaking travel.
Dream teachers and join many It’s an international
interesting clubs. school, so it may be
GV: Phuong Mai –Lesson Plan English 6 20
expensive.
5. While-Speaking: 6’
* Aims: To provide an opportunity for Ss to practise making their choice
of the type of school they would like to go to, and give reasons.
* Content: Discuss your choice with your friends.
* Products: Role play and practice in front of the class.
* Organization
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
Task 5: T - Ss, Ss - Ss Task 5: Discuss your choice with your friends.
- Teacher tells students to
work in groups of four * Which school (among the three above) would you like to
- and share the answer, go? Why?
reminds them to take note Example:
the information from other A: Which school would you like to go to?
members. B: I'd like to go to Dream School.
- Teacher invites some A: Why?
students to share their B: Because I'd like to paint in the art club.
preparation and makes sure
they speak in full
sentences.
Students share their ideas
with the whole class.
6. Post-Reading and Speaking: 3’
* Aim:- To help students improve next time.
- Check students’ understanding about the reading passage.
* Content: comments and vote for the most interesting and informative presentation.
* Products: Students present about their favorite school in front of the class.
* Organization:

Teacher’s and Ss’ activities Content

T - Ss, Ss - Ss Ss’ presentation
- Teacher allows students to
give comments for their Ex: Among the three shools above I would you like
friends and vote for the to……
most interesting and
informative presentation.
Teacher gives feedback and
comments.
7. Consolidation: 3’
* Aims: To consolidate what students have learnt in the lesson.
* Content: summarize the main content in the lesson.
* Products: Students say what they have learnt in the lesson.
* Organization:

- Teacher asks students to - Some new words

talk about what they have - read and understand some information about 3 schools.
learnt in the lesson. - Present thier choice of the type of school
they would like to go to, and give reasons.
8. Homework 2’
* Aim: To revise the knowledge that students have gained in this lesson.
* Content: Review the lesson and prepare for the next lesson and do exersie in the
GV: Phuong Mai –Lesson Plan English 6 21
workbbook
* Products: Students’ textbook and workbook
* Organization:

- Teacher asks students to - Write down your opinion about a school in their books.
write down their opinion - Prepare for the next lesson: Unit 1-Skills 2.
about a school in their
books.
- Teacher asks students to
search for information about
their school.

Planning date:
Week: UNIT 1: MY NEW SCHOOL
Period : Lesson 6: Skills 2

I. OBJECTIVES:
By the end of the lesson, students will be able to:
- Use the lexical items related to the topic My new school;
- Listen for specific information about school activities;
- Write a passage about their new school.
II. LANGUAGE ANALYSIS
1.Knowledge:
* Vocab: foreign language (n) ,helpful ( adj), favourite (adj), friendly (adj), biology (n)
* Grammar: The present simple
2. Skills: Listening, speaking , reading and writing
3. Attitude: To teach SS to work hard, love their school and friends
4. Competences: Know how to use the present simple. Students will developed listening and
writing skills.
III. MATERIALS
* Preparation:
1. Teacher: Text books , pictures, planning , …
- Grade 6 textbook, Unit 1, Skills 2
- Project /Pictures.
- sachmem.vn
2. Students: Text books, notebooks, posters, ….
IV. PROCEDURES :
1.Warm-up:5’
* Aim: - Check students’ knowledge related the previous lesson.
- To introduce the topic of listening.
* Content: Game: Network ( my new school)
* Products: Ss write word on the board.
* Organization
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
* Warm up (Individual work) * Game: Network
T -Ss
- T guides students to play game teacher
about “ My new school”

GV: Phuong Mai –Lesson Plan English 6 22

- Ss write word on the board.

* suggested anser:
- teacher, friends, subjects, shool things,…
2. Pre –listening: 5’
Task 1
* Aims: To help students brainstorm and have an overview about what they are going to
listen to.
* Content: Guess the answer to the following questions.
* Products: Students say the correct answers aloud.
* Organization
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
Task 1:T –Ss : Ss- Ss ( pair work) I/ Listening:
Set the sence: Task 1: Guess the answer to the following
- Teacher draws students’ attention to questions.
word PALMER – the name of a school in 1. Do you think the students there wear
America, lets them know they are going to uniforms?
listen to Janet, a student from Palmer 2. Do they learn Vietnamese as a foreign
school. language?
- Teacher lets students work in pairs and Suggested answers:
discuss the questions. Encourage them to 1. Yes, they do.
speak English and feel free to make Yes, they do.
guesses. * Vocabulary:
- -Teacher plays the recording once. - foreign language (n): ngôn ngữ nước ngoài
Students listen to check their guesses. - helpful ( adj): hay giúp đỡ
- favourite (adj): yêu thích
- friendly (adj): thân thiện
- biology (n): sinh học

3. While -listening : 10’

* Aims: To help students develop listening skill for specific information.

* Content: Listen and choose the correct answer .
* Products: Students’ correct answers.
* Organization
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
Task 2: T - Ss, Ss - Ss Task 2: Listen again and choose the
-Teacher asks students to read the correct answer A or B.
statements, underline the key words, * Read and find the key words
reminds them to pay attention to keywords
while listening.
* Listen and choose the correct answer
Answer key:
1. A
- Teacher plays the recording. 2. B
- Teacher asks students to listen and 3. B
choose the answers. 4. A
- Teacher asks students to compare their 5. A
answer with the partner. Audio script:
- Teacher calls on some students to write Hi. My name’s Janet. I’m eleven years old.

GV: Phuong Mai –Lesson Plan English 6 23

their answers on the board, then play the I’m now in year 6 at Palmer School. I like it
recording once again and check with the here.
class. My classmates are friendly. The teachers at
my school are nice and very helpful, and my
favourite teacher is Mrs. Smith. She teaches
us maths. I have two hours to study
Vietnamese every week. I usually do my
homework in the library. We wear our
uniforms every day, but today we aren’t.
We’re going to have a biology lesson on a
farm.
4. Post- listening: 5’

* Aims:. To check students’ understanding of the listening part.

* Content: Summarize the information of the listening part.
* Products: Ss summarize the information in the listening part before the class.
* Organization
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
Task 3:T-Ss, Ss-Ss( work group)
- Students work in groups of four. * Summarize the information of the
- Teacher asks students to summarize the listening part.
information in the listening part and talk
about it.
- Teacher helps if necessary.
5. Pre-Writing: 5’
* Aims: To help students have information about their school.
To help students write simple sentences for the next writing passage.
* Content: Write the answers to the questions about your school.
* Products: Students’ correct answers in their notebooks.
* Organization
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
Task 4: T - Ss, Ss – Ss (pair work) II/ Writing:
Teacher asks students to work Task 3: Write the answers to the following
independently to answer the questions. questions about your school.
- Teacher encourages students to write in
full sentences and tells them that their 1. What is the name of your school?
sentences must be grammatically and  It’s Nguyen Trai Secondary school
logically correct with the right choice of 2. Where is your school?
words and correct punctuation.  It’s in Mo Duc District, Quang Ngai
- Teacher allows students to look back the city
reading passages. 3. How many classes does your school have?
- Teacher asks students to pair compare  It has 16 classes
their answers. 4. What do students do at your school?
- Teacher invites one or two students to  They learn many subjects and play
write their answers on the board and gives games at breaktime
feedback as models. …….
While-Writing: 10’
* Aim: To let students learn and help each other write a complete passage about their
school.
* Content: Write a paragraph of 40-50 words about your school.
* Products: Students’ perfect writing on the posters.
GV: Phuong Mai –Lesson Plan English 6 24
* Organization
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
- Teacher asks students to work in groups Task 4:Use the answer in Task 3 to write
of four, gives them a large piece of paper a paragraph of 40-50 words about your
and asks them to write the full paragraph school. You can refer to the reading
into the paper in 6 minutes. passages to help you
- Teacher asks students to pay attention to
punctuation, structures, word choice, * Students’ writing
linking words, etc.
Post-Writing: 3’
* Aim: To cross check and final check students’ writing.
* Content: Cross check students’ writing
* Products: Students check the others’ writing carefully .
* Organization

Teacher’s and Ss’ activities Content

- Teacher has the groups swap and give * Sample paragraph:
feedback on each other’s writing. My school is Giang Son School. It is
- Teacher then gives feedback on one in the centre of my village. It has 12
writing as a model.. classes with over 500 students. We
study many subjects: maths, history,
science, and of course, English. We
often play games during break
time.My teachers are friendly, and
my friends are helpful. I like my
school.
* Consolidation: 1’
* Aim: To consolidate what students have learnt in the lesson.
* Content: Summarize the main content in the lesson.
* Products: Say aloud what they have just learnt in front of the class.
* Organization
Teacher’s and Ss’ activities Content
- Teacher asks students to talk about what - Some new words.
they have learnt in the lesson. - Listen a passage about Janet’s school in
America.
- write a paragraph about your school.
* Homework: 1’
* Aim: To revise the knowledge that students have gained in this lesson.
- To allow students finalize their versions after being checked by friends and teacher.
* Content: Review the lesson and prepare for the next lesson and do exersie in the
workbbook
* Products: Students’ textbook and workbook
* Organization
- Teacher asks students to write down the - Rewrite the paragraph in the notebooks.
paragraph in their books. - Prepare for the project.
- Teacher asks students to prepare the new
lesson.

GV: Phuong Mai –Lesson Plan English 6 25

Planning date:
Week: UNIT 1: MY NEW SCHOOL
Period: Lesson 7: Looking back and project

I. OBJECTIVES:
By the end of the lesson, students can:
- Review the vocabulary and grammar of Unit 1;
- Apply what they have learnt (vocabulary and grammar) into practice through a project.
II. LANGUAGE ANALYSIS
1.Knowledge:
* Vocab: revise words of unit 1
* Grammar: The present simple , adverbs of frequency.
2. Skills: Speaking , reading and writing.
3. Attitude: To teach SS to work hard, love their school and friends
4. Competences: Use the present simple and adverbs of frequency more effectively;
Students will be developed listening and writing skills.
III. MATERIALS
* Preparation:
1. Teacher: Text books , pictures, planning , …
- Grade 6 textbook, Unit 1, Looking back and project
- Project/ Pictures.
- sachmem.vn
2. Students: Text books, notebooks, posters, ….
IV. PROCEDURES:
Warm-up : 3’
* Aim: To revise the vocabulary related to the topic and lead in the next part of the
lesson.
* Content: Game: * Brainstorming ( new school)
* Products: Students write correct words on the board.
* Organization
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
* Warm up (Team work) * Game: * Brainstorming
T -Ss

GV: Phuong Mai –Lesson Plan English 6 26

- Teacher divides the board, and divides the * Suggested anwser:
class into 2 teams. - teacher, friends, subjects, school things,
- Members of each team take turns and write …
as many school things as possible in 2
minutes.
The group having more correct answers is the
winner

Looking back: 20’

Task 1

* Aim: To help Ss revise the vocabulary items they have learnt in the unit.
* Content: Look at the pictures. Write the correct words in the gaps.
* Products: Students write corr ectwords on the board. ( say the correct answers aloud)
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
- T –Ss : I/ Looking back:
- Teacher encourages students to Task 1: Look at the pictures. Write the correct
complete the task individually. words in the gaps.
- Students exchange their textbooks Answer key:
with their partners. 1. uniform
- Teacher gives feedback as a class 2. pencil sharpener
discussion. 3. notebook
4. compass
5. calculator
6. ruler

Task 2:

* Aims: To help students revise the combination: to study, to have, to do, to play + N.
* Content: Match the words in A with the words/ phrases in B.
* Products: Students’ correct answers on the board.
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
Task 2:T –Ss : Ss- Ss ( individual Task 2: Match the words in A with the words/
work and pair work) phrases in B.

- Teacher encourages students to Answer key:

complete the task individually. 1. e
- Students exchange their textbooks 2. d
with their partners. 3. b
- Teacher gives feedback as a class 4. a
discussion. 5. c

- Teacher encourages students to

provide more school activities.

Task 3+ 4
* Aims: To help students revise the present simple tense.
* Content: Complete the sentences with the present simple.
* Products: Write correct words on the board.
GV: Phuong Mai –Lesson Plan English 6 27
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
Task 3: T - Ss, Ss - Ss Task 3: Complete the sentences with the
- Teacher has students complete the present simple.
task individually. Answer key:
- Students exchange their textbooks 1. comes
and give feedback to each other. 2. don’t
- Teacher gives feedback as a class 3. walks
discussion. 4. do
5. teaches

Task 4:T-Ss, Ss-Ss Task 4: Complete the text with the correct
- Students work in pairs. form of the verbs in bracket
- Teacher asks students to read the
sentences carefully and give the * Answer key:
answers. 1. is
- Students complete the task and 2. has
discuss the answers. 3. walks
- Teacher gives feedback as a class 4. study
discussion 5. likes

Task 5
* Aims: To help students revise the postion of adverbs of frequency in context.
* Content: Put the adverb in brackets in the correct place in each sentence
* Products: Students write correct answers on the board.
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
Task 5:T-Ss, Ss-Ss Task 5: Put the adverb in brackets in the
- Students work in pairs. correct place in each sentence.
- Students complete the task and Answer key:
discuss the answers. 1. I always remember to do my homework.
- Teacher gives feedback as a class 2. Nick usually gets good marks in exams.
discussion. 3. We do not often see a rabbit in town.
4. I rarely read in bed at night.
5. Do yousometimes sing in the shower?
Project: 17’
* My dream school
* Aims: To allow students to apply what they have learnt (vocabulary and grammar) into
practice through a project.
* Content: Make project “My dream school”
* Products: Students’ answers on the posters. .
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
Project: T - Ss, Ss – Ss (group work) * My dream school
- Teacher sets the context of a School
Convention that will be occurred
right now in the classroom.
- Teacher divides students into 4 big
groups. Each group will act as a
representative of a school, come to
the convention to introduce and
GV: Phuong Mai –Lesson Plan English 6 28
enroll new students.
- Teacher lets the groups discuss and
summarise the information and Sample writing: My dream school is located in
design A0 size posters about their Quang Ngai city. It’s new and modern. The
school. school has a big schoolyard with many tall trees.
- Teacher asks the class to listen to the It has a computer room music room, a library , a
reports and ask questions if they canteen and swimming pool… The classroom is
would like to. very large with air conditional and fans. There is
- Students will critically evaluate all a big garden behind the school so that the
the posters, then give 1 vote for the students plant many kinds of tree, flowers, and
most attractive poster. vegetables there.
- Teacher gives comments and
feedback to all 4 posters and awards
special prize to the group which has
the most votes.
- Ss can complete the project as
homework if you are short of time.

* Consolidation (3’)
* Aim: To consolidate what students have learnt in the lesson.
* Content: summarize what students have learnt in the lesson.
* Products: Say aloud what they have learnt in the lesson.
* Organization:

Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content

- Teacher asks students to talk about - revise vocabulary in unit 1.
what they have learnt in the lesson. - Sounds la:/ and/A/;
- The present simple;
- Adverbs of frequency.
- Make a project about your school.

* Homework (2)
* Aim: To revise the knowledge that students have gained in Unit1 and To prepare for the
next lesson
* Content: Review the lesson and prepare for the next lesson and do exersie in the
workbbook
* Products: Students’ textbook and workbook
* Organization:

Teacher’s and Ss’ activities Content

- Teacher asks students to revise old - Complete the project
lesson and to do exercise in - Prepare for the next lesson: Unit 2 –Lesson 1.
workbook. Getting started.
- Teacher asks students to complete
the project and prepare the new
lesson.

GV: Phuong Mai –Lesson Plan English 6 29

Planning date:
Week: UNIT 2: MY HOUSE
Period: Lesson 1: Getting started – A look inside

I. OBJECTIVES:
By the end of the lesson, students will be able to:
- Use the lexical items related to the topic My house;
- Ask and answer about where someone lives.
II. LANGUAGE ANALYSIS
1. Knowledge:
* Vocabulary: town house (n), country house (n), flat (n),….
* Grammar: possessive case and prepositions of place
2. Skills: Listening, speaking and reading
3. Attitude: To teach SS to be hard- working and love their house .
4. Competences: - Co-operation, self- study, using language to do exercises
III. MATERIALS
- Grade 6 textbook, Unit 2, Getting started
- Projector, CD, stereo, cards, visual aids
- sachmem.vn
IV. PROCEDURES
Warm-up (5’)
* Aim: To introduce the topic and To lead in the topic of My house.
* Content: Game: Pelmanism
* Products: Work in groups ( choose the number; say the correct answers aloud)
* Organization
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content

Warm up: Team work * Game: Pelmanism

GV: Phuong Mai –Lesson Plan English 6 30

TYPES OF HOUSE :
Teacher divides class into 2 teams and
asks students to choose a pair of number.
- If students choose the correct number
and picture, They get 2 marks.
-The team who has more correct words is
the winner.

* T - SS
Lead in: These are types of house
T asks Ss some questions. 1. How is your house?
Ss answer 2. Is your house big or small?
- T Introduces the topic of the lesson. 3. How many rooms are there in your house?

2. Presentation (5’)
* Aim: To prepare students with vocabulary related to the topic My house;
* Content: learn some vocabularies related to the topic.
* Products: Students read and understand the meaning of vocab.
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content

* Pre teach vocabulary * Vocabulary

- Teacher use different techniques to teach - flat (n) : căn hộ
vocab (pictures, situation, realia) - country house (phr. n): nhà ở quê
- Follow the seven steps of teaching vacab. - town house (phr. n) : nhà ở phố
- Repeat in chorus and individually - behind (prep) : Ở đằng sau
- cousin (n): anh, chị, em họ
- move (v): di chuyển
- Copy all the words
* Checking vocab: < matching>

Task 1: Listen and read: (5’)

* Aims: To set the context for the listening and reading text.
* Content: Listen and read the dialogue.
* Products: Students read and understand the content of the dialogue.
Students know how to role play
* Organization
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
* Set the sences: T-Ss * Chatting
- Teacher draws students’ attention to the 1. What are Nick and Mi doing?
pictures in the textbook and asks them 2. What might they talk about?
some questions about the pictures. Suggested answers:
1. They are talking to / discussing with each
other through the Internet.
* Now we are going to listen a (Students’answers)
conversation between Nick and Mi
Task 1: T-Ss Task 1: Listen and read.
- Teacher plays the recording, asks
students to underline the words related + They are talking about their houses.
to the topic My house. (Teacher may + Mi is describing their new flat which her

GV: Phuong Mai –Lesson Plan English 6 31

check the meaning of some words if family was moving to.
necessary.)
- Teacher can play the recording more
than once.
- Students listen and read.
- Teacher can invite some pairs of
students to read aloud.
- Then, teacher confirms the correct
answer:
2. Practice (10’)
Task 2
* Aims: To help Ss understand the text.
* Content: Read and Tick the correct answers.
* Products: Students say the correct answers aloud.
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
Task 2: T-Ss, Ss-Ss, T-Ss Task 2: Tick the correct answers.
- Teacher asks students “Which family “Which family members does Mi talk about?”
members does Mi talk about?” without Answer key:
reading the conversation again.
- Then, teacher tells them to read it again
individually and check their answers.
- Teacher allows students to share their
answers before discussing as a class and
encourages them to give evidence.
- Teacher calls some students to check.
Task 3:(5’)
* Aims: To help Ss further underst and the text.
* Content: Complete the sentences.
* Products: Students write correct words on the board.
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
Task 3:T-Ss, Ss-Ss Task 3: Complete the sentences.
- Teacher asks students to work * KEY:
independently to fill each blank with the 1. sister
word from the conversation. 2. TV
- Teacher allows students to share their 3. town
answers before discussing as a class. 4. country
- Teacher calls some students to check. 5. three
Teacher confirms the right answers and
writes on the board.
Production:(5’)

Task 4: (3’)
* Aims: To develop students’ knowledge of the vocabulary about types of house.
* Content: Complete the word web: Types of house. (work in groups)
* Products: Students’ answers on the posters .
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
Task 4: Complete the word web: Types of
Task 4:T-Ss, Ss-Ss house.
GV: Phuong Mai –Lesson Plan English 6 32
- Teacher divides the class into two * Game: Networking
teams, then writes the topic “Types of
house” on the board and gives them two * Suggested answers:
minutes to discuss.
- After that time, a student from each
team one by one runs to the board and
writes one word.
- The team which has more correct
answers is the winner.

Task 5:(5’)
* Aims: To help students practise asking and answering about where they live.
* Content: Take survey and report.
* Products: Students take survey and present in front of the class.
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
Task 5:T-Ss, Ss-Ss
- Teacher asks students to work in groups Task 5: Survey
of 4 or 6 to take turns to ask and answer Suggested answers:
about where they live. In my group, Linh lives in a flat, Lan and
- Teacher can model with one student. Huong live in a country house, etc….
- Teacher moves around to observe and
offer help when needed.
- By the end of the activity, one student
from each group can stand up and report
to the class.
3. Consolidation (3’)
* Aim: To consolidate what students have learnt in the lesson.
* Content:. Vocab about school things and Read and understand content of the
conversation
* Products: Say aloud some words they remember from the lesson.
* Organization
Teacher’s and Ss’ activities Content
- Teacher asks students to talk about what - Vocab about house and know types of house.
they have learnt in the lesson. - Read and understand content of the
- Ss work indepently conversation
4. Homework (2’)
* Aim: To review the lesson and prepare for the next lesson.
* Content: Review the lesson and prepare for the next lesson ( A closer look 1)
* Products: Students’ textbook and workbook
* Organization
Teacher’s and Ss’ activities Content
- T reminds Ss to do homework and - Learn by heart all the new words.
prepare the new lesson. - Read the dialogue again.
- Prepare lesson 2 ( A closer look 1).

GV: Phuong Mai –Lesson Plan English 6 33

Planning date:
Week : UNIT 2: MY HOUSE
Period : Lesson 2: A closer look 1

I. OBJECTIVES:
By the end of the lesson, students will be able to:
- Use the lexical items related to the topic My house;
- Use the vocabulary and structures to talk about the names of rooms and furniture pieces in the
house;
- Pronounce and recognize the sounds /s/ and /z/.
II. LANGUAGE ANALYSIS
1.Knowledge:
* Vocab: house lexical items and practising the sound /s/ and /z/.
* Grammar: simple present.
2. Skills: Listening, speaking , reading and writing
3. Attitude: To teach SS to be hard- working, love, keep and treasure their house .
4. Competences: - Co-operation, self- study, using language to do exercises
III. MATERIALS
* Preparation:
1. Teacher: Text books , pictures, planning , …
- Grade 6 textbook, Unit 2, A closer look 1
- Smart TV/Pictures, sets of word cards
- sachmem.vn
2. Students: Text books, notebooks, posters, ….
IV. PROCEDURES : (STAGES)
* Warm-up (5’)
* Aim: -To activate students’ knowledge on the topic of the unit and vocabulary
related to the topic, the targeted vocabulary and its pronunciation
* Content: Chit chatting ( make some questions)

GV: Phuong Mai –Lesson Plan English 6 34

* Products: Students answer the questions exactly .
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
* Chit chatting
- T ask students some questions 1. How many rooms are there in your
- Ss answer house?
2. What are they?
- T leads in the lesson about vocabulary 3. What is there in each room?
and pronunciation
that “In today lesson, we are going to
learn more words to describes rooms
and furniture and two sounds /s/
and /z/.”
2. Presentation (7’)
* Aim: To revise and teach the names of rooms in the house.
* Content: Some vocab in the lesson
* Products: Read and understand the meaning of the words.
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content

* Pre teach vocabulary * Vocabulary

- Teacher use different techniques - hall (n): hội trường, phòng lớn
to teach vocab (pictures, situation, - chest of drawers (n): ngăn kéo tủ
realia) - sink (n): bồn rửa
- Follow the seven steps of - dishwasher (n): máy rửa chén
teaching vacab. - cupboard (n): tư đựng bình ly
- Repeat in chorus and individually - poster (n): tấm áp phích
- Copy all the words - ceiling fan (n) : quạt trần
* Checking vocab: < Matching - light (n): đèn diện

2. Practice (10’)

Task 1: (5’)
* Aims: To revise / teach the names of furniture pieces.
* Content: Name the things in each room in Ex. 1.
* Products: practice in pairs and name the correct things.
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
Task 1: T-Ss Task 1: Name the things in each room
- Teacher asks students to work in pairs in Ex. 1.
to do this activity.
- Teacher writes the names of the rooms Suggested answers:
on the board in different places, then - Bedroom: lamp, picture, chest of
calls on students from different pairs to drawers
go to the board and write the name of - Living room: lamp, sofa, picture
the furniture under these rooms. - Hall: picture
- Remind students that one piece of - Kitchen: fridge, cupboard, dishwasher,
furniture can belong to more than one sink
room. - Bathroom: shower, sink, toilet
- Teacher asks other students to comment Other words: chair, fan, air conditioner,
and asks them if they can add some cooker, etc.
GV: Phuong Mai –Lesson Plan English 6 35
more things to each room.
-
Task2: (5’)
* Aims: To help Ss practise asking and answering about the furniture in a room
* Content: Guessing game (ask and answer about the furniture in a room)
* Products: Ss ask and answer( pair work) in front of the class.
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
Task 2: T - Ss, Ss - Ss Task 2: Guessing game
- Teacher models this activity with a Example:
student. Ss 1: What’s in your room?
- Teacher asks students to work in pairs: Ss 2: A lamp and a chest of drawers.
one student thinks of a room in his / her Ss 1: Is it the bedroom?
house; the other asks questions to guess Ss 2: Yes.
the room.
- Teacher calls some pairs to practise in
front of the class.
- Teacher comments on their
performance.
PRONUNCIATION (5’)
Presentation (Pre-teach the sounds /s/ and /z/ )
* Aims: To help students identify how to pronounce the final sounds /s/ and /z/ at the
end of the words.
* Content: pronounce the final sounds /s/ and /z/ at the end of the words.
* Products: know how to pronounce the final sounds /s/ and /z/ ( repeat and repeat
the words)
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
- Teacher introduces 2 sounds s/ and /z/ * Rules:
to students and lets them listen and + Final –s is pronounced /s/ after voiceless
repeat the words in Ex. 4 (p. 18). sounds (/t/, /p/, /k/, /f/, /θ/).
- Teacher has students comment on how + Final –s is pronounced /z/ after voiced
to pronounce these two sounds at the sounds (/b/, /d/, /g/, /n/, /m/, /l/, etc.) and
end of the words. any vowel sounds.
- Teacher quickly explains the rules: Suggested answers:
- Teacher asks students to give some - /s/: cats, lamps, books, months
words they know containing these /z/: beds, dogs, cans, rooms, videos,
sounds. cookers, bees
Practice (10’)

Task 3:(5’)
* Aims: To help students practise pronouncing these sounds in words.
* Content: Listen and write the words in the correct column.
* Products: Students pronounce words exactly and write the words in the correct
column.
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
- Teacher asks students to read and listen Task 3: Listen and write the words in
again the words, then put them in the the correct column. Then listen and
correct column. repeat.
- Students work individually. Answer key:
GV: Phuong Mai –Lesson Plan English 6 36
- Teacher plays the recording for students /s/ /z/
to listen, repeat and check their lamps, sinks, cupboards, sofas,
answers. flats, toilets, kitchens, rooms
Task 4:(5’)
* Aims: To help students pronounce the final sounds /s/ and /z/ correctly in context.
* Content: Listen to the conversation. Underline the final “s” in the words
* Products: Students listen and underline exactly the final “s” in the words (pair
work)
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
Task 4:T-Ss, Ss-Ss Task 4: Listen to the conversation.
- Have students quickly read the Underline the final “s” in the words and
conversation and underline the final “s” put them into the correct column. (p.
in the words. Now play the recording 18)
for students to listen to the conversation
and write /s/ or /z/ under each “s” that
they have underlined. Answer key:
- Tell them to put the words with the /s/: chopsticks, lamps
final “s” in the correct column /z/: bowls, things, homes
according to the sound of “s”.
- Ss work in pairs to compare their
answers. Check students’ answers. Ask
them to explain their answers.
- Play the recording again for students to
repeat each line of the conversation.
- Ask students to work in pairs to practice
the conversation.
3. Production (5’)
* Aim: To give students chance to apply what they have learnt.
* Content:. Whispering ( say the full sentence)
* Products: Practice reading the sentences in groups.
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’ activities Content
- Teacher divides the class into 4 big
groups and asks students to stand in * Game: Whispering
four lines. * Suggested sentences:
- The member in the last place will make 1. There are two bedrooms in my house.
a sentence containing at least a word 2. My living room has a TV, two lamps,
and a sound they have learnt; then, some pictures and a sofa.
whisper the sentence to the next 3. The toilets in my school are clean.
member of the group. They will
continue until the member in the first
place and this member will say the .
sentence aloud.
- The fastest group will win the game.
4. Consolidation(3’)
* Aim: To consolidate what students have learnt in the lesson.
* Content:. Summarize the main content.
* Products: Some students volunteer ( summarize the lesson briefly).
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’ activities Content
GV: Phuong Mai –Lesson Plan English 6 37
- Teacher asks students to talk about what - Vocabulary about the things in room
they have learnt in the lesson and house how to pronounce the sound /s/
and /z/.

5. Homework (2’)
* Aim: To revise the lesson and prepare for the next lesson.
* Content: Review the lesson and prepare for the next lesson and do exersie in the
workbbook
* Products: Students’ textbook and workbook
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’ activities Content
- T reminds Ss to do homework and - Learn by heart all the new words.
prepare the new lesson. - Find 5 more words with the sound /s/
and 5 more words with the sound /z/.
- Prepare lesson 3 ( A closer look 2)..

Planning date:
Week : UNIT 2: MY HOUSE
Period : Lesson 3: A closer look 2

I. OBJECTIVES:
By the end of the lesson, students will be able to know how to use the possessive case and
prepositions of place correctly.
II. LANGUAGE ANALYSIS
1.Knowledge:
* Vocab: School lexical items
* Grammar: Possessive case and prepositions of place
2. Skills: Listening, speaking , reading and writing
3. Attitude: To teach SS to work hard, love their house .
4. Competences: Know how to use possessive case and prepositions of place . Students will
developed speaking and co-operating skills.
III. MATERIALS
* Preparation:
1. Teacher: Text books , pictures, planning , …
- Grade 6 textbook, Unit 2, A closer look 2
- Smart TV/Pictures, sets of word cards
- sachmem.vn
2. Students: Text books, notebooks, posters, ….
IV. PROCEDURES : (STAGES)
* Warm-up (5’)
* Aim: To activate students’ prior knowledge and vocabulary related to the
targeted grammar of possessive case, preposition of place and to increase students
interest.

GV: Phuong Mai –Lesson Plan English 6 38

* Content: Game: Memory game
* Products: look at pictures, remember and answer the questions.
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
* Warm up (group work) * Game: Memory game

- Teacher divides the class into 4 groups.

- Teacher tells students the rules of the
game:
+ Students have to study the picture of 3
people (Jack, Polly and Greg) and try to
remember the things belonging to each
person in 30 seconds without writing Answer keys:
down in their notebooks. 1. Whose ball is it?
+ After 30 seconds, teacher shows the - It’s Jack’s ball.
things of Jack, Polly and Greg and a 2. Whose T-shirt is it?
member of each team has to answer – It’s Greg‘s T-shirt.
quickly the question “Whose is it?” 3. Whose bike is it?
+ The group with more correct sentences - It’s Greg’s bike
will be the winner. 4. Whose sock is it?
– It’s Polly’s sock.

Lead in
Teacher says: “This lesson today is going
to tell you one way to express the
possessive and how to use the preposition
of place correctly.”
1. Presentation (5’)
* Aim: To introduce students the form of possessive case.
* Content: Learn about the possessive case.
* Products: understand and know how to use the form of possessive case.
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
- Teacher draws students’
attention to the words in the THE POSSESSIVE CASE
answers from the Warm-up ( Dạng sở hữu cách)
“Greg ‘s T- shirt, Jack’s ball,
Polly’s sock” and asks them
whether they know the meanings  We use “ ’s ” to show possession.
of these words.  name’s + noun
- Teacher provides or confirms Ex: Polly’s sock.
the answers and lead in the  singular noun’s + noun
grammar focus of the lesson: Ex: teacher’s book.
- Teacher writes the form of the
possessive case on the board:
2. Practice (10’)
Task 1: (5’)
* Aims: To help students identify the correct form of possessive case.
GV: Phuong Mai –Lesson Plan English 6 39
* Content: Choose the correct answer.
* Products: Students write the correct key on the board.
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
Task 1:T –Ss : Ss- Ss Task 1: Choose the correct answer.
- Teacher asks students to do the
exercise individually and then * Answer key:
compare their answers with a 1. grandmother’s
classmate. 2. sister’s 3. cousin’s
- Check the answers as a class. 4. Nam’s 5. An’s
Teacher confirms the correct
answers
Task2: (5’)
* Aims: To help students practise forming the correct form of possessive case.
* Content: Complete the sentences with the correct possessive forms.
* Products: Students write the correct key on the board.
* Organization
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
Task 2: T - Ss, Ss - Ss Task 2: Complete the sentences with the
- Teacher has students do this correct possessive forms.
exercise individually and calls *Answer key:
on two students to write their 1. Mi’s 2. teacher’s
answers on the board. 3. Nick’s 4. father’s
- Teacher draws all students’ 5. brother’s
attention to the board and
checks the answers together.
- Teacher confirms the correct
answers.
3. Presentation (5’)
PREPOSITIONS OF PLACE
* Aims: To help students identify different prepositions of place and use them
correctly to describe where people or things are.
* Content: Learn about prepositions of place.
* Products: understand prepositions of place.
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
* T-Ss, Ss-Ss PREPOSITIONS OF PLACE
- Teacher asks students what ( Giới từ chỉ nơi chốn)
prepositions of place they  We use prepositions of place to describe
know. Encourage students to where people or things are.
say as many as possible
- Have them look at the
Remember box to see if the
prepositions they have
mentioned are the same.
Teacher confirms how to use
prepositions of place

Task 3:(7’)
GV: Phuong Mai –Lesson Plan English 6 40
* Aims: To help students practice using prepositions of place correctly to describe
where people or things are.
* Content: Write the correct preposition in the box under each picture. ( Game:
Lucky number)
* Products: Students say the full sentences aloud. (team work)
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
Task 3: T - Ss, Ss - Ss Task 3: Write the correct preposition in the
- Teacher divides the class into 2 box under each picture.
teams. + Game: Lucky number
- Each team chooses the number Answer key:
they like, then tries to make the 1. on 2. next to
sentencecorrectly. 3. behind 4. in
- The team which chooses a 5. in front of 6. between
lucky number will get two 7. under
points without answering any 1. The dog is on the chair.
questions. 2. The dog is next to the armchair.
- The team which has more 3. The cat is behind the TV.
points will be the winner. 4. The cat is in the wardrobe.
5. The dog is in front of the kennel / doghouse.
6. The cat is between the lamp and the armchair.
7. The cat is under the table.
Task 4(5’)
- Teacher has students look at Task 4: Decide True or False statements.
the picture of the room and Answer key:
asks them to describe the room 1. T
briefly, then has them read 2. F (The school bag is under the table.)
each sentence, look at the 3. F (The clock is between the two pictures.)
picture and decide if each 4. T
sentence is true or false. If it is 5. F (The cap is on the pillow.)
false, ask them to correct it.
- Teacher has students do this
exercise individually before they
share their answers with a
partner.
- Ask some students to read out
their answers.
- Teacher confirms the correct
ones.
4:Production (7’)
* Aims: - To help students practise asking and answering about the position of
things.
* Content: Game: Memory challenge ( ask and answer about the position of things)
* Products: Ask and answer in pairs
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
T - Ss, Ss – Ss * Memory challenge
- Teacher has students work in
pairs to play the game Memory Example:
challenge. A: Where are the books?
- Students look at the picture in B: They’re on the table.
GV: Phuong Mai –Lesson Plan English 6 41
Exercise 4 for 30 seconds and
then cover it.
- They ask and answer questions
about the position of the things
in the picture.
- Teacher invites some pairs to
perform in front of the class.
5. Consolidation (3’)
* Aim: To consolidate what students have learnt in the lesson.
* Content: Summarize the content of the lesson.
* Products: Some students raise their hands and say what students have learnt in the
lesson.
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’ activities Content
Teacher asks students to talk - Possessive case
about what they have learnt in - Prepositions of place
the lesson. - Make sentences about them

4. Homework (2’)
* Aim: To revise the knowledge that students have gained in this lesson and prepare
the new lesson
* Content: Review the lesson and prepare for the next lesson and do exersie in the
workbbook
* Products: Students’ textbook and workbook
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’ activities Content
- T reminds Ss to do homework - Do exercises in the workbook.
and prepare the new lesson. - Prepare lesson 4 ( communication)
Planning date:
Week: UNIT 2: MY HOUSE
Period: Lesson 4 : Communication

I. OBJECTIVES:
By the end of the lesson, students will be able to:
- Learn how to give suggestions;
- Practise using some grammar points and vocabulary related to the topic.
II. LANGUAGE ANALYSIS
1.Knowledge: -
* Vocab: house lexical items
* Grammar: The simple present.
Giving suggestions: How about + V-ing?
Let’s + V.
2. Skills: Speaking , reading and writing
3. Attitude: To teach SS to work hard, love their house
4. Competences : develop their language skills, as well as communication, summarizing abilities,
…
III. MATERIALS
* Preparation:
1. Teacher: Text books , pictures, planning , …
- Grade 6 textbook, Unit 2, communication
- Smart TV/Pictures, sets of word cards
GV: Phuong Mai –Lesson Plan English 6 42
- sachmem.vn
2. Students: Text books, notebooks, posters, ….
IV. PROCEDURES : (STAGES)
1.Warm-up (5’)
* Aim: To introduce the lesson and to lead in the lesson.
* Content: * Pictures describing
* Products: Some students stand in front of the class to describe about the house .
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
* Warm up * Game:
- Teacher shows the picture of * Pictures describing
Nam’s house and asks students
to describe as many things in the
picture as possible.
- Students give their answers.
- Teacher checks the answers.

 Lead in * Suggested answers:

Teacher leads students into the - This is Nam’s house.
lesson by telling what they are - There are 4 rooms in his house.
going to learn: “We are going to - In the living room, there is a lamp, a picture, a
learn how to give suggestions table and a sofa.
and practice describing a house”. - In the kitchen, there is a fridge, a dishwasher
and a sink.
….
2. Presentation (10’)
* EVERYDAY ENGLISH
Task 1: (5’)
* Aim: To introduce two ways to give suggestions.
* Content: Learn about two ways to give suggestions.
* Products: Understand how to give suggestions.
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
Task 1:T –Ss : Ss- Ss Task 1: Listen and read a dialogue.
- Pre structure * Giving suggestions:
- Teacher plays the recording + Structure:
for students to listen and read  How about + V-ing?
the dialogue between Elena  Let’s + V.
and her mum at the same
time. Audio script:
- Teacher asks students to pay
attention to the highlighted Elena: My bedroom isn't nice.
sentences. Mum: How about putting apicture on the wall?
- Teacher elicits the structures Elena:Great idea, Mum.
to give suggestions from Mum: Let's go to the department store to buy
students. one.
- Teacher has students practise
the dialogue in pairs. Call some
pairs to practise the dialogue in
GV: Phuong Mai –Lesson Plan English 6 43
front of the class.
3. Practice (5’)
Task 2: (5’)
* Aims: To help students practise giving suggestions.
* Content: Make similar dialogues.
* Products: Role play and practise in front of the class.
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
Task 2:T –Ss : Ss- Ss Task 2: Make similar dialogues.
- Teacher give students some situations to * Suggested answers:
practice: 1/ A: The kitchen is dirty and messy.
Situation 1: You want to clean something B: How about cleaning it and
in your home. rearranging things?
Situation 2: You want to do some activities A: Great idea, Elena.
at the weekend with your friend. B: Let’s do it right now.
Situation 3: You want to buy some new
school things 2/ A: I am so bored.
- Teacher asks students to work in pairs. B: How about going to the cinema
- Teacher moves around to observe and this weekend?
provide help. A: Great idea!
- Teacher calls some pairs to practise in front ……
of the class, then comments on their
performance.
4. Presentation (5’)
* LIVING PLACES
Task 3: (5’)
* Aims: To give students a sample of a house description
To help students practise using some grammar points and vocabulary related
to the topic
* Content: Complete the sentences.
* Products: Work in pairs and give the correct answers.
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
Task 3: T - Ss, Ss – Ss Task 3: Complete the sentences.
- Teacher has students look at the picture and
try describing Mi’s grandparents’ country
house.
- Teacher encourages students to say full
sentences.
- Then ask students to work in pairs to
complete the given sentences.
- Teacher moves around to observe and
provide help.
- After that, teacher invites students to share
their answers. Answer key:
- Teacher confirms the correct answers. 1. country 2. are 3. Is 4.
chairs 5. on
Practice (5’)
Task 4:(5’)
* Aims: To help students practise asking and answering about the differences
between two houses.
GV: Phuong Mai –Lesson Plan English 6 44
* Content: Find the differences between the two houses.
* Products: prastice in pairs. ( Ask and answer correctly).
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
Task 4: T - Ss, Ss – Ss Task 4: Find the differences
- Have Ss work in pairs to find the between the two houses.
differences betwen the two houses.
- Before Ss do t his activity, model the way
to do this with a stu dent.

T: Nick lives in a country house.

Where does Mi live?
- T (look at Nick's house):
Ss: : She lives in a town house.
T: How many rooms are there in
- Student (look at Mi's house):
Mi's house?
After some minutes, the pair which has the
Ss: There are six rooms.
most differences will be the winner. - Ask
What about in Nick's house?
some pairs to act out the conversation. Other
How many rooms are there? etc.
pairs listen and add more differences if there
are any.
4. Production (5’)
* Aims: To help students practise describing their house
* Content: Draw a simple picture of your house.
* Products: Students’ drawing and description
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
Task 5: T - Ss, Ss - Ss Task 5: Drawing a simple picture of
- Teacher gives students 5 – 7 minutes to your house.
draw a simple picture of their house, then house and their friend’s. Other
asks students work in pairs to tell each other students and teacher listen and give
about their house. If time allows, teacher *Model writing
can ask them to note down the differences
between their houses.
- Teacher calls some students to describe
their friend’s house to the class.
- Students may also present the differences
between their house and their friend’s. Other
students and teacher listen and give
comments. The group with higher scores will
win the game.
This is my house . It is a small house
in the country. There are 5 rooms in
my house such as living room,
bathroom, dining room, my room and
my parent’s room. There is a sofa, a
coffee table and two stools in the
living room. There are six chairs and
a table, and a fridge in the dining
room. The kitchen is big and fully

GV: Phuong Mai –Lesson Plan English 6 45

equipped. There is a bed , a table, a
chair and a bookshelf in the bedroom.
There is a sink and a toilet in the
bathroom….. I love my house..

5. Consolidation (3’)
* Aims: To consolidate what students have learnt in the lesson.
* Content: Summarize the content in the lesson .
* Products: Some students say aloud what students have learnt in the lesson.
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
Teacher asks students to talk about what - Giving suggestions: How about +
they have learnt in the lesson. V-ing?
Let’s + V.
- Draw and describe their friend’s
house to the class.

6. Homework (2’)
* Aim: To revise the knowledge that students have gained in this lesson. And prepare
for the next lesson: Skills 1.
* Content: Review the lesson and prepare for the next lesson and do exersie in the
workbbook
* Products: Students’ textbook and workbook
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’ activities Content
- T reminds Ss to do homework and prepare - Write down the results and feedback
the new lesson. of the previous interviews.
- Prepare lesson 5 ( skills 1)

Planning date:
Week: UNIT 2: MY HOUSE
Period: Lesson 5 : Skills 1

I. OBJECTIVES:
By the end of the lesson, students will be able to understand the description of a room at the Crazy
House Hotel in Da Lat and describe one room (in their imagination) in that hotel.
II. LANGUAGE ANALYSIS
1. Knowledge:
* Vocab: strange (adj), shape (n) ,mess (adj) ,….
* Grammar: The simple present.
2. Skills: Speaking , reading
3. Attitude: To teach SS to work hard, love their house.
4. Competences : Co-operation, self- study, friend.develop their language skills,
B. Preparation:
III. MATERIALS
* Preparation:
1. Teacher: Text books , pictures, planning , …
- Grade 6 textbook, Unit 2, skills 1
- Smart TV/Pictures, sets of word cards

GV: Phuong Mai –Lesson Plan English 6 46

- sachmem.vn
2. Students: Text books, notebooks, posters, ….
IV. PROCEDURES : (STAGES)
1.Warm-up (5’)
* Aim: To introduce the topic of reading
* Content: Chatting ( make some questions about type of houses)
* Products: Students say the correct answers aloud.
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
- T- Ss * Play a game : Chatting
- Teachers have students look at some 1. What type of house is this?
pictures and asks students some Country house, town house, villa, stilt, flat
questions about houses 2. How are these houses?
- Students answer the questions They are strange (crazy) houses.
- And then lead in the new lesson.

Lead in (2’)
* Aim: To lead in the lesson about Skills 1.
* Content: Look at the picture and answer the questions.
* Products: Students say the correct answers aloud.
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
- T - Ss I/ READING SKILL:
- Teacher asks students to read the Task 1:
“Reading skill” box and explains any PREDICTING
words that Ss do not know.
- Teacher tells students that predicting
is an important reading skill that can help
them have a general understanding of the
text.
* Set the scene:
-Teacher tells students to quickly look
at the text, the pictures and answer the Answer key:
questions. 1. It’s an email.
- Teacher asks for students’ answers. 2. The text is about Nick’s room at the Crazy
- Then teacher tells them to read the House Hotel.
text quickly to check their prediction.
- After that, teacher confirms the
correct answers.
2. Pre- reading (5’)
* Aim: To provide students with some lexical items before reading the text again.
* Content: Learn some vocab related in the lesson.
* Products: Read and understand the meaning of vocab.
* Organization:

Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content

T –Ss : * VOCABULARY:
- Pre teach vocabulary - strange (adj) = crazy : kì lạ, lạ thường
- Teacher use different techniques to - shape (n) : hình dạng
teach vocab (pictures, situation, …..) - mess (adj) : lộn xộn, bừa bộn
GV: Phuong Mai –Lesson Plan English 6 47
- Repeat in chorus and individually
- Copy all the words
* Checking vocab: < Rub out and
remmember>

3. While reading (10’)

Task 2: (3’)
* Aims: To help students develop their reading skill for specific information
(scanning).
* Content: Read the text and answer the questions
* Products: Students write the correct answers on the board.
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
Task 2:T –Ss : Ss- Ss Task 2: Read the text and answer the
- questions.
Teacher lets students look at Ex. 2 on p. (Ex. 2, p. 22)
-.
22 and tells them how to do this kind of exercise:
+ Read the questions. Answer key:
+ Underline the key words. 1. He’s in Da Lat with his parents.
+ Locate the key words in the text. 2. There are ten rooms.
+ Read that part and answering the 3. Because there’s a big tiger on the wall.
questions. 4. It’s under the bed.
- Teacher has students read the text in
detail to answer the questions and
tells them to underline parts of the
email that help them with the
answers.
- Teacher tells them to compare their
answers in pairs before giving the
answers to teacher.
- Teacher asks them to give evidence
when giving the answers
Task 3: (5’)
* Aims: To help students further develop their reading skill for specific information
(scanning).
* Content: Circle the things in the Tiger Room.
* Products: Students say the correct key aloud.
* Organization :
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
Task 3: T - Ss, Ss – Ss Task 3: Circle the things in the Tiger
- Teacher asks students to read through Room.
the words given and then locate them (Ex. 3, p. 22)
in the text. If they find a similar word .
in the text, they should circle it in the * Answer key:
list. a window
- Teacher has students compare their a lamp
answers. a wardrobe
- Teacher checks and confirms the a desk
correct answers
Post-Reading(5’)

GV: Phuong Mai –Lesson Plan English 6 48

Task 4:
* Aims: To check students’ reading comprehension
* Content: Retelling the text.
* Products: A student retells the text fluently.
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
- Ask students what to include when Task 3: Retelling
they want to describe a room in the • Name of the room
hotel. Here are some things: • Reason for the name
- Ss Write these points on the board and • Position of things in the room
retell “Tiger room” to their partner
4. Pre- speaking (5’)
* Aims: To help Ss prepare ideas for the speaking activity;
* Content: Create a new room for the hotel.
* Products: Student draw a plan for the room clearly.
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
Task 4: T - Ss, Ss – Ss II. Speaking
- Teacher tells each student to create a Task 4: Create a new room for the hotel.
new room for the hotel and draw a Draw a plan for the room. (Ex. 4, p.22)
plan for the room.
- Teacher sets a time limit for students - Why is the room called the … room?
to do it. (Dog / Cat / Horse / Dolphin (cá heo)/
- Teacher asks students to give the - Where is your bed?
room a name and bear in mind the (under the window / next to the door / in the
organisation of the room including the corner / in the middle of the room / …)
things in the room and their position. - What are there in your room?
Have them note down quickly these (a TV / a fridge / air-conditioner / a piano,
ideas …)
- How is your room?
(big / bright with a lot of windows / cool /
clean / dirty / messy / tidy / nice / …
5. While-Speaking (6’)
* Aims: To provide an opportunity for students to practise describing the
hotel room they have designed.
* Content: Describe your plan.
* Products: Some students describe their plans in front of the class.
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
Task 5: T - Ss, Ss - Ss Task 5: Describe your plan. (Ex. 5, p. 22)
- Have students work in pairs and show
the plan to their partner. Ask students
to take turns to describe their rooms.
- Remind them to focus on the three
points on the board. Move around to
observe and offer help.
Call on some students to show their
plan to the whole class and describe
it. Other students and the teacher
listen and vote for the best plan
EX:

GV: Phuong Mai –Lesson Plan English 6 49

This is the Dolphin Room. There’s a big
Dolphin at the door. There’s a table and a
sofa in the middle of the room ...
6. Post Speaking (3’)
* Aim:- To help students improve next time.
* Content: Listen a description and vote the most interesting and informative
presentation
* Products: Students comment and give opinions clearly.
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’ activities Content
T - Ss, Ss - Ss Example:
- Have students give comments on their This is the Shark Room. There's a big shark
friends and vote for the most at the door. There's a table and a sofa in the
interesting and informative middle of the room.
presentation.
- Teacher gives feedback and
comments.
7. Consolidation (3’)
* Aims: To consolidate what students have learnt in the lesson.
* Content: Summarize the lesson’s content briefly.
* Products: Some students say aloud what theyhave learnt in the lesson.
* Organization:
- Teacher asks students to talk about - Some new words
what they have learnt in the lesson. - Read email about a crazy room.
- Create a room and describe it
8. Homework (2’)
* Aim: To revise the knowledge that students have gained in this lesson.
* Content: Review the lesson and prepare for the next lesson .
* Products: Students’ textbook and workbook.
* Organization:
- Teacher asks students to complete - Draw a room and describe it
their picture and write down - Prepare for the next lesson: Unit 2-Skills 2.
description in their books.
- Teacher asks students to prepare the
new lesson
Planning date:
Week: UNIT 2: MY HOUSE
Period: Lesson 6: Skills 2

I. OBJECTIVES:
By the end of the lesson, students will be able to:
- Use the lexical items related to the topic My house;
- Listen to get information about rooms and houses;
- Write an e-mail to a friend.
II. LANGUAGE ANALYSIS
1. Knowledge:
* Vocab: revise some words
* Grammar: The present simple.
2. Skills: Listening, speaking , reading and writing .
3. Attitude: To teach SS to work hard, love their house.
4. Competences: Co-operation, self- study; Students will developed listening and writing skills.
GV: Phuong Mai –Lesson Plan English 6 50
III. MATERIALS
* Preparation:
1. Teacher: Text books , pictures, planning , …
- Grade 6 textbook, Unit 2, Skills 2
- Smart TV/Pictures.
- sachmem.vn
2. Students: Text books, notebooks, posters, ….
IV. PROCEDURES : (STAGES)
1.Check –up (5’)
* Aim: To revise the content of the previous lesson and to introduce the new lesson.
* Content: Describe your house.
* Products: Two students describe their houses in front of the class.
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
* Warm up (Individual work)
* Describe your house.
- T calls some students and asks them to Hello every body. Today I want to talk about
describe their house. my house…….
- Lead in
- Teacher introduces students the content of
the lesson today: “You have just talked
about your house. In the listening lesson
today, we are going to listen to Mai talking
about her house.”
1. Pre-Listening (10’)
- Task 1: (7’)
* Aim: To prepare students for the listening text.
* Content: Name the pieces of furniture.
* Products: Students to read the correct words out loud.
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
- Ask students to look at the pieces of Task 1: Name the pieces of furniture.
furniture and parts of the house and name
them. * Answer key:
- Call on some students to read the words 1. bookshelf
out loud. 2. sofa
- Ask some students to write the words on 3. desk
the board. 4. clock
5. window

- Have students guess if these things are

mentioned in the listening text. If they
say yes for a thing, put a tick next to the *Answer key:
word. Things mentioned in the listening text: bookshelf,
- Play the recording once for students to desk, clock, window.
check their guesses.
- Teacher confirms the correct answers for
their prediction.
GV: Phuong Mai –Lesson Plan English 6 51
3. While -listening (5’)
* Aims: To help students develop listening skill for specific information.
* Content: Listen and tick True or False .
* Products: Students say T or F aloud.
* Organization :
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
Task 2: T - Ss, Ss - Ss Task 2: True or False statements. (Ex. 2, p. 23)
- - Have students look at the sentences in
this activity. Ask them how to do it. * *Answer key:
Give them some strategies to do the 1. F (There are three people.)
exercise (e.g. reading the sentences, 2. F (There are six rooms.)
underlining the key words, listening to 3. T
the text paying attention to the key 4. T
words, deciding if each sentence is true 5. F (She reads books.)
or false). * Audio script:
- Play the recording twice for students to My name’s Mai. I live in a town house in Ha Noi.
do Exercise 2. For a better class, ask I live with my parents. There are six rooms in our
students to take notes of the information house: a living room,
to explain why a sentence is false. a kitchen, two bedrooms, and two bathrooms.
I love our living room best because it’s bright.
- Have students share their answers in It’s next to the kitchen.
pairs. I have my own bedroom. It’s small but beautiful.
- Invite some pairs to give their answers There’s a bed, a desk,
and confirm the correct ones. a chair, and a bookshelf. It also has a big window
- Play the recording again if needed, and a clock on the wall.
stopping at the place where students find I often read books in my bedroom.
it difficult to hear.
- For a better class, ask students to correct
the false sentences.
4. Post- listening (5’)
* Aims: To develop students’ speaking skill, using the available information and their
background knowledge.
* Content: Summarize the information of the listening part.
* Products: A student Summarize briefly about the information of the listening part.
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
- T-Ss, Ss-Ss( work group) * Summarize the information of the listening
- Students work in groups of four. part.
- Teacher asks students to summarize the Example:
information in the listening part and talk Mai lives in a town house in Ha Noi.
about it. she lives with her parents. There are six rooms in
- Teacher helps if necessary. her
house: a living room,……

5. Pre-Writing (5’)
* Aims: To help students identify the form of an email.
* Content: Necessary parts of an email
* Products: Understand and identify the form of an email exactly.
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
- T - Ss * Necessary parts of an email
GV: Phuong Mai –Lesson Plan English 6 52
- Show this sample email on the slide / on
the board or give each student a handout 1. How many parts are there in the email?
with this sample. (5 parts)
2. What is the subject of the email? Where can
you find it? (My house – We can find it in the
- Ask them several questions: “Subject line”)
3. What does An write about in the first paragraph
of the
email? (The introduction)
4. What does An write about in the second
paragraph? (The subject(s) of the email)

* How to write email to friend?

1. In the subject line, write briefly, what the
email is about.
2. Begin the email with a greeting
(Dear/Hi/Hello).
3. The introduction is the first paragraph. Ask
about his/her health, thank him/her for the
previous email or write the reasons for the email,
etc.
4. In the body, write the subject(s) of the email.
Write each subject in a new paragraph.
5. The conclusion is the last paragraph. Say
goodbye, ask your friend to write back, etc.
6. While-Writing (5’)
* Aim: To help students brainstorm ideas for their email.
* Content: Answer the questions.
* Products: Students’ correct answers in their notebooks.
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
- Tell students that now they are going to Task 3: Answer the questions. (Ex. 3, p. 23)
focus on the body of the email only.
- Tell them that answering the guiding * Suggested answer.
questions is one way to help them
brainstorm as well as organise ideas for 1. I live in a small house in the countryside
their writing. 2. There are 5 rooms in my house. Living room,
- Have students answer the questions two bedrooms,….
individually, encouraging them to write 3. I like the living room best because I can watch
the answers in full sentences. TV with my parents and my younger sister.
- Move around to offer help.
- Invite some students to share their
answers to the class. Comment on their
answers.

7. Post-Writing (3’)
* Aim: To help Ss practise writing an email to their friend telling about their house.
* Content: Write an email to their friend telling about their house
* Products: Students’ email stick on the board. (team work)
* Organization:

GV: Phuong Mai –Lesson Plan English 6 53

Teacher’s and Ss’ activities Content
* Sample email:
- Ask students to write the body of their From: [email protected]
email individually. To: [email protected]
- Ask one or two students to write their Subject: My house.
email on the board. Hi Mira,
- Ask Ss to look at the email and Thank for your email. Now, I’ll tell you about my
comment. house.
- T feedbacks and gives mark. I live with my parents and younger brother in a
town house.
It's big. There are six rooms: a living room, a
kitchen, two bedrooms
and two bathrooms. I like the living room best
because I can watch TV with
my parents and younger brother together.
What about you? Where do you live?
Tell me in your next e-mail.
Best wishes,
* Consolidation (2’)
* Aim: To consolidate what students have learnt in the lesson.
* Content: Summarize some main content in the lesson.
* Products: Students say what they have just learnt in the lesson.
* Organization:

Teacher’s and Ss’ activities Content

- Teacher asks students to talk about what - listen to the passage describing Mai's house
they have learnt in the lesson. - write email.
* Homework (2)
* Aim: To review the knowledge that students have gained in this lesson.
- To allow students finalize their versions after being checked by friends and teacher.
* Content: Review the lesson and prepare for the next lesson and do exersie in the workbook.
* Products: Students’ textbook and workbook.
* Organization:

- Teacher asks students to write down the - Rewrite the email

email in their books. - Prepare “ Looking back and project”
- Teacher asks students to prepare the new
lesson.
Planning date:
Week: UNIT 2: MY HOUSE
Period: Lesson 7: Looking back and project

I. OBJECTIVES:
By the end of the lesson, students will be able to:
- Review the vocabulary and grammar of Unit 2;
- Apply what they have learnt (vocabulary and grammar) into practice through a project.
II. LANGUAGE ANALYSIS
1. Knowledge:
* Vocab: revise some words of unit 2.
* Grammar: The possessive case and Prepositions of place.
2. Skills: Speaking , reading and writing.
GV: Phuong Mai –Lesson Plan English 6 54
3. Attitude: To teach SS to work hard, love their house.
4. Competences: Use The possessive case and Prepositions of place correctly ; Students will be
developed some skills.
III. MATERIALS
* Preparation:
1. Teacher: Text books , pictures, planning , …
- Grade 6 textbook, Unit2 , Looking back and project
- Smart TV/Pictures.
- sachmem.vn
2. Students: Text books, notebooks, posters, ….
IV. PROCEDURES : (STAGES)
1.Warm-up (5’)
* Aim: To help students revise the vocabulary items they have learnt in the unit.
* Content: Kim’s game ( pictures about types of house and kinds of rooms)
* Products: Ss write the name of the pictures on the board. (team work)
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
* Warm up (Team work) * Game: Kim’s game
T -Ss
- Teacher divides class into 2 teams. * suggested answer:
- Teacher asks students to look at the pictures - town house, country house, stilt house, villa,
on the screen and asks them to memorise living room, bedroom, bathroom, kitchen,
the pictures in 1 minute. dining room, ….
- Teacher hides the pictures and asks Ss write
the name of the pictures. The team who has
more correct answers is the winner.
VOCABULARY
1. Task 1 (5’)
* Aim: To help Ss revise the vocabulary items they have learnt in the unit.
* Content: Put the words into the correct group
* Products: Students write the correct answers on the board.
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
- T –Ss : Task 1: Put the words into the correct group.
- Have Ss do this activity individually Add a new word to each group.
then compare their answers with their
partners. Types of house Rooms Furniture
- Ask for Ss' answers or ask one student flat ,town chest of
to write his/ her answer on the board. house, living drawers, sink,
- Confirm the correct answers. country house room, fridge,
bedroom, dishwasher,
bathroom, cupboard,
kitchen,
Task 2: (5’) grammar
* Aims: To help Ss revise the possessive case.
* Content: Complete the second sentence with the correct possessive form.
* Products: Some students write correct answers on the board.
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
- T –Ss ; Ss - Ss Task 2: Complete the second sentence with the
correct possessive form. (Ex. 2, p. 24)
GV: Phuong Mai –Lesson Plan English 6 55
. Have students say how to form the Answer key:
possessive form with proper names and 1. teacher’s
singular nouns. 2. brother’s
- Ask students to do the exercise 3. Elena’s
individually and then exchange their 4. grandfather’s
answers with a classmate. 5. Vy’s
- Call on some students to write their
answers on the board. Other Ss give
comments.
- Confirm the correct answers.
Task 3. (5’)
* Aims: To help students revise the prepositions of place.
* Content: Make sentences using prepositions of place.
* Products: Students write the full sentences on the board.
* Organization
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
Task 3: T - Ss, Ss - Ss Task 3: Make sentences using prepositions of
- Ask students to say the prepositions of place. (Ex. 3, p. 24)
place they have learnt. * Answer key:
- Have students look at the pictures and do 1. The cat is on the table.
this exercise individually. Ask some 2. The dog is in front of the kennel / doghouse.
students to write the sentences on the 3. The cat is between the bookshelf and the sofa.
board. 4. The cat is behind the computer.
- Check students’ answers. 5. The girl is on the sofa.
+ T can have Ss play a game : Lucky 6. The boy is next to the sofa.
number
Task 4: (5’)
* Aims: To help Ss revise describing their favourite room using the prepositions of place.
* Content: Write three sentences to describe your favourite room
* Products: Students write the full sentences on the board.
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
Task 4:T-Ss, Ss-Ss Task 4: Write three sentences to describe your
- Ask one student what room in the house favourite room. (Ex. 4, p. 24)
is his / her favourite.
- Encourage him / her to say one or two
sentences about it.
- Have students write three sentences to
describe their favourite room. Ex:
- Remind students to use prepositions of - There’s a big bed next to the door.
place. - There is a clock on the wall.
- Students share their sentences with their - There are books on the bookshelf.
partners.
- Some students are asked to write their
sentences on the board.
- Teacher and other students give
feedback.
5. Project (5’) *
* Aims: To allow students to apply what they have learnt (vocabulary and grammar) into
practice through a project.
* Content: Take survey.
GV: Phuong Mai –Lesson Plan English 6 56
* Products: Students’ painting
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
Project: T - Ss, Ss – Ss (group work) * ACTIVITY 1
- Students work in groups. One student in - Survey:
each group asks other group members
question “Which one would you like to live in? Why?”
- Ss fill the information in the following
table.
- This student then summarises their group
members’ answers and reports the result
to the whole class.
- Have Ss work in groups to draw their
own strange house. Ask them to * ACTIVITY 2
practise describing their house in
groups before telling the class about Students’ painting
their house.The class votes for the best
strange house.
* Consolidation (2’)
* Aim: To consolidate what students have learnt in the lesson.
* Content: Summarize the lesson’s content.
* Products: A student says what she/ he has just learnt in the lesson.
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
- Teacher asks students to talk about what - revise vocabulary in unit 2
they have learnt in the lesson. - revise the possessive case and the prepositions
of place
- Draw a strange house.
* Homework (2’)
* Aim: To revise the knowledge that students have gained in Unit2 and To prepare for the next
lesson
* Content: Review the lesson and prepare for the next lesson and do exersie in the workbbook
* Products: Students’ textbook and workbook
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’ activities Content
- Teacher asks students to revise old - Complete the project
lesson and to do exercise in workbook. - Prepare for the next lesson: Unit 3 –Lesson 1.
- Teacher asks students to complete the Getting started.
project and prepare the new lesson.
Planning date:
Week: UNIT 3: MY FRIENDS
Period: Lesson 1: Getting started

I. OBJECTIVES:
By the end of the lesson, students will be able to use lexical items about body parts and
appearance; describe people’s appearance.
II. LANGUAGE ANALYSIS
1. Knowledge:
* Vocabulary: glasses (n), cheek (n), foot/feet (n), buiscuit (n), magazine (n),…
* Grammar: Verbs be and have, the present contunious.
2. Skills: Listening, speaking and reading
GV: Phuong Mai –Lesson Plan English 6 57
3. Attitude: To teach SS to be hard- working, love their school and friends..
4. Competences: - Co-operation, self- study, using language to do exercise
III. MATERIALS
- Grade 6 textbook, Unit 3, Getting started
- smart TV and cards, visual aids
- sachmem.vn
IV. PROCEDURES : (STAGES)
1. Warm-up (5’)
* Aim: To revise old lesson and to introduce the new lesson
* Content: Listen an EL song and fill in the blanks
* Products: Students say words aloud (indepently)
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
* Warm up: T – SS ( Individual work) Game: Listen an EL song and fill in the
blanks
MY ROOM AND MY FRIEND
- Teacher plays the song on speakers. Inside my beautiful room. I have a bed and a
- Teacher asks Ss look at the song and listen (1)………
carefully; and then fill in the blanks. And a mirror. I have many (2)……… .
- Ss go to the board and write words And they (3)………come. We(4)………, we
play, we have(5)……...
- T feedbacks and give marks In my room, In my room.
- T plays the song again and asks whole class sing a Me and my friend in my room.
song together. * Suggested answer:
1. wardrobe 2. Friend 2. Often 4.eat 5.
fun
Lead in: 1.Do you have a lot of friends?
T asks Ss some questions to lead in the new lesson Yes / No
Ss answer 2. What can you do with your friends?
- T introduces the topic of the lesson. - We can eat and drink together
Today we are going to learn about “My friend” - We can play some games,
- we sing some songs
2. Presentation (5’)
* Aim: To prepare students with vocabulary related to the topic My friend;
* Content: learn some vocabularies related to the topic.
* Products: Students read and understand the meaning of vocab.
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
* Vocabulary
- picnic (n) : dã ngoại
* Pre teach vocabulary - biscuit (n): bánh quy
- Teacher use different techniques to teach - pass (v) : đưa qua, chuyển qua
vocab (pictures, situation, realia) - glasses (n): cặp mắt kính
- Follow the seven steps of teaching vacab. - Magazine (n): Tạp chí
- Repeat in chorus and individually - surprise (adj): ngạc nhiên
- Copy all the words
* Checking vocab: < what and where>
Practice: (20’)
Task 1 (5’)
* Aims: To set the context for the introductory text; To introduce the topic of the unit.
* Content: Listen and read the conversation.

GV: Phuong Mai –Lesson Plan English 6 58

* Products: Students read and understand the meaning of the conversation
Students know how to role play
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
* Set the sences: T-Ss Task 1. Listen and read
- Teacher draws students’ attention to the
pictures in the textbook and asks them some 1. What are Phong and Nam doing?
questions about the pictures. 2.What is Phong favourite magazine?
* Now we are going to listen a conversation 3. Who do Phong and Nam see?
between Phong, Nam and Mai , Chau 4. Where are the two girls going?
- Teacher plays the recording, asks students to * Suggested answers:
underline the words they have learnt in the 1. They are having a picnic.
vocabulary part. 2. It’s …
- Teacher can play the recording more than 3. They see …
once. They are going to …
- Students listen and read.
Task 2 (5’)
* Aims: To help Ss deeply understand th e text.
* Content: Listen to the conversations again and fill in the blanks
* Products: Student write correct words on the board.
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
Task 2: T-Ss, Ss-Ss, T-Ss Task 2: Listen to the conversations again
- Students work in pairs. and fill in the blanks * Answer key:
- Teacher asks students to share their answers 1. picnic
before discussing as a class. 2. favourite magazine
- Teacher asks students to explain where they 3. Mai and Chau
can find the answer 4. glasses; long black hair
5. are going to
Task 3:(5’)
* Aims: To revise and provide Ss with some vocabulary related to parts of the body.
* Content: Label the body parts with the words in the box.
* Products: Stick the right stickers with the body part on the board.
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
Task 3:T-Ss, Ss-Ss Task 3: Label the body parts with the
- Teacher has students go to the board to stick words in the box. * Answer key:
the right stickers with the body part names to 1. eye 6. foot
the right place on the picture. 2. nose 7. arm
- Students work independently to do Ex. 3 3. shoulder 8. mouth
- Teacher asks students to give out more names 4. hand 9. cheek
of body parts that they have known. 5. leg 10. hair
- T has Ss read all words in chorus * Another words for body parts: ear, head,
eyebrow, finger, butt, chest,...
Task 4:(5’)
* Aims: To revise and provide Ss with some vocabulary to describe part s of the body
* Content: Complete the word webs.
* Products: Students’ correct answers on the posters ( work group)
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
Task 4: Work in groups. Complete the
GV: Phuong Mai –Lesson Plan English 6 59
- Students can work in groups to complete this word webs. Answer key:
task. 1. Long/short: hair, arms, legs, fingers, …
- Teacher introduces examples and structures Ex: She has long hair.
for students to make sentences to describe a 2. Big/small: nose, eye, hand, feet, mouth, …
friend. Ex: She has big eyes.
3. Hair: blonde, curly, wavy, straight, short,
long, dark, …
Ex: He has short curly hair
Production:(5’)
Task 5: (3’)
* Aims: To help Ss practise using words for body parts and appearance through a guessing
game.
* Content: Game: Describe and guess.(work in groups)
* Products: Practise in groups .
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
Task 4:T-Ss, Ss-Ss Task 5: Game: Describe and guess.
Work in groups, take turns to describe a * Suggested answers:
classmate. Other group members guess who - She has glasses, she has long black hair.
he/she is. - Is she Mai?
- No, she isn’t. She has a small nose.
- Is she Lan? Yes, she is.
3. Consolidation (3’)
* Aim: To consolidate what students have learnt in the lesson.
* Content:. Vocab about school things and Read and understand content of the conversation
* Products: Say aloud some words they remember from the lesson.
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’ activities Content
- Teacher asks students to talk about what they - some new words
have learnt in the lesson. - Read and understand content of the
- Ss work indepently conversation
4. Homework (2’)
* Aim: To review the lesson and prepare for the next lesson.
* Content: Review the lesson and prepare for the next lesson ( A closer look 1)
* Products: Students’ textbook and workbook
* Organization
Teacher’s and Ss’ activities Content
- T reminds Ss to do homework and prepare the - Learn by heart all the new words.
new lesson. - Read the dialogue again.
- Prepare lesson 2 ( A closer look 1).
Planning date:
Week: UNIT 3: MY FRIENDS
Period: Lesson 2: A closer look 1

I. OBJECTIVES:
By the end of the lesson, students will be able to use vocabulary and structures about body parts,
appearance and personality and pronounce correctly the sound /p/ and /b/ in isolation and in
context.
II. LANGUAGE ANALYSIS
1. Knowledge:
* Vocab: friend lexical items and practising the sound /p/ and /b/
GV: Phuong Mai –Lesson Plan English 6 60
* Grammar: Verbs be and have, the present contunious
2. Skills: Listening, speaking , reading and writing
3. Attitude: To teach SS to be hard- working, love their friends.
4. Competences: - Co-operation, self- study, using language to do exercises
III. MATERIALS
* Preparation:
1. Teacher: Text books , pictures, planning , …
- Grade 6 textbook, Unit 3, A closer look 1
- Smart TV/Pictures, sets of word cards
- sachmem.vn
2. Students: Text books, notebooks, posters, ….
IV. PROCEDURES : (STAGES)
* Warm-up (5’)
* Aim: To review on people’s body parts, recall students vocabulary.
* Content: Game : Network (write words for body parts and words to describe parts of the
body)
* Products: Students write correct words on the board.
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
Networking :
- Teacher divides the class into two teams, then
writes the topic “words for body parts
words to
” on the board and gives them two minutes to words for describe
discuss. body parts parts of the
- After that time, a student from each team one
body
by one runs to the board and writes one word.
- The team which has more correct answers is * Suggested answer.
the winner. 1. eyes, nose, hair, head….
2. long, short, fat, slim

- Lead in : Today we are going to learn some

personality adjectives;
2. Presentation (7’)
* Aim: To teach Ss some personality adjectives;
* Content: Some vocabularies about personality.
* Products: Read and understand the meaning of vocab.
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
- T - Ss UNIT 3: MY FRIENDS
* Pre teach vocabulary Lesson 2 : A closer look 1
- Teacher use different techniques to teach * Vocabulary
vocab (pictures, situation, …..) - confident (adj): tự tin
- Repeat in chorus and individually - caring (adj):quan tâm, lo lắng
- Copy all the words - active (adj): năng động
- careful (adj): cẩn thận
- creative (adj): sáng tạo
- shy (adj): e thẹn, nhút nhát
- kind (adj): tốt bụng
* Checking vocab: < Matching> - clever (adj): thông minh

2. Practice (10’)

GV: Phuong Mai –Lesson Plan English 6 61

Task 1: (5’)
* Aims: To teach Ss some personality adjectives; To give Ss practice with these adjectives.
* Content: Match the adjectives to the pictures
* Products: Students write the correct key on the board.
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
Task 1: T-Ss Task 1: Match the adjectives to the pictures
Answer key:
- Students work in pairs to match the words 1. c (caring)
with the correct pictures: 2. e (active)
- Teacher can help students by describing the 3. d (hard-working)
pictures. 4. a (funny)
- Check and confirm the correct answers 5. b (confident)

Task2: (5’)
* Aims: To practice the targeted language (adjectives) and the background knowledge.
* Content: Use the adjectives in the box to complete the sentences.
* Products: Ss say the correct answers ( pair work)
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
Task 2: T - Ss, Ss - Ss Task 2: Use the adjectives in the box to complete
- Teacher asks students to work individually. the sentences. Pay attention to the highlighted
- Ss find the correct adjectives to fill the words/phrases
blank in each sentence. Answer key:
- Then discuss with a partner. 1. creative
- Teacher checks and corrects (if needed 2. kind
3. friendly
4. careful
5. clever
Task 3: (5’)
* Aims: To provide Ss with freer practice with personality adjectives.
* Content: Game: Why do I love my friends?
* Products: Ss say perfect sentences aloud ( group work)
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
Task 3:T-Ss, Ss-Ss Task 3: Game: Why do I love my friends?
* Suggested answer:
- Have Ss work in groups and play the 1. I love Trang because she is kind, creative and
game. funny.
- Students work in groups. 2. I love Minh because he is smart, caring and
- Teacher asks students to write at least 2-3 friendly.
personalities to describe each members. 3. …
Teacher asks students to read out, beginning
with I love … because he/she is …, … and
-
PRONUNCIATION (/b/ and /p/. )
Task 4: (5’)
* Aims: To help students identify how to pronounce the sounds /b/ and /p/.
To help Ss practise pronouncing these sounds correctly in words.
* Content: Pronunciation: /b/ and /p/. Listen and repeat. Circle the words you hear
GV: Phuong Mai –Lesson Plan English 6 62
* Products: Read and know how to pronounce the sounds /b/ and /p/;
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
Task 4:T-Ss, Ss-Ss PRONUNCIATION
- Task 4: Pronunciation: /b/ and /p/. Listen and
- Teacher has students listen to the repeat. Circle the words you hear.
recordings and stops to let students repeat
each word.
- Students work independently to circle the
words they have listened.

=> Answer: 1. pig 2. pear 3. buy 4. rope

Task 5:(5’)
* Aims: To help Ss pronounce the sounds /b/ and / p / in context.
* Content: Listen and Practice the chant.
* Products: Whole class practise the chant exactly.
* Organization:

Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content

Task 5 :T-Ss, Task 5: Listen. Practice the chant.

- Ask Ss to listen while T plays the

recording.
Clap or use an instrument like a tambourine
to help Ss notice the rhyme.
- Play the recording again and ask Ss to
chant along.
- Tell them to pay attention to the words that
have the sounds /b/ and /p/ and the rhyme

3. Production (5’)
* Aim: To recognise the targeted vacabulary and sounds.
* Content:. Game ( revise words about personalities,…)
* Products: Students plays in groups.
* Organization:

Teacher’s and Ss’ activities Content

- * Game: “Up and down”
- Teacher explains the rules:  Round 1: Teacher says 1-15 personalities that
- Students plays on groups. students have learnt in the lesson. Students stand
up for the positive ones, sit down for the negative
ones.
 Round 2: Teacher says 1-15 words containing the
sound /b/ and /p/. Students stand up for the ones
with the “b” sound, sit down for “p” sound.

4. Consolidation(3’)
* Aim: To consolidate what students have learnt in the lesson.
GV: Phuong Mai –Lesson Plan English 6 63
* Content: Vocab about personalities and how to pronounce the sounds /b/ and / p /
* Products: Say aloud some words they remember from the lesson.
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’ activities Content
- Teacher asks students to talk about what - Vocabulary about personalities and how to
they have learnt in the lesson pronounce the sound /s/ and /z/.

5. Homework (2’)
* Aim: To review the lesson and prepare for the next lesson.
* Content: Review the lesson and prepare for the next lesson and do exersie in the workbbook
* Products: Students’ textbook and workbook
* Organization:

Teacher’s and Ss’ activities Content

- T reminds Ss to do homework and prepare - Learn by heart all the new words.
the new lesson. - Prepare lesson 3 ( A closer look 2)..

Planning date:
Week: UNIT 3: MY FRIENDS
Period: Lesson 3: A closer look 2

I. OBJECTIVES:
By the end of the lesson, students will be able to use the present continuous to talk about things
happening now and ask about appearance and personality.
II. LANGUAGE ANALYSIS

GV: Phuong Mai –Lesson Plan English 6 64

1. Knowledge:
* Vocab: friends lexical items
* Grammar: the present continuous; revise the present simple
2. Skills: Listening, speaking , reading and writing
3. Attitude: To teach SS to work hard, love their friends.
4. Competences: Students know how to use the present continuous and students will developed
speaking and co-operating skills.
III. MATERIALS
* Preparation:
1. Teacher: Text books , pictures, planning , …
- Grade 6 textbook, Unit 3, A closer look 2
- Smart TV/Pictures, sets of word cards
- sachmem.vn
2. Students: Text books, notebooks, posters, ….
IV. PROCEDURES : (STAGES)
* Warm-up (5’)
* Aim: To activate students’ prior knowledge and vocabulary related to the targeted
grammar of present continuous and to increase students interest.
* Content: * Game: Chatting ( some questions related the introduction in the new
lesson)
* Products: Students look at the picture and answer the questions correctly.
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
* Warm up (group work) * Game: Chatting
- T - Ss
- T has students look at some pictures and asks
them some questions.
- Students look at the P, listen and and answer
the questions.
- T feedback and lead in the new lesson.

1.What are these boys doing?

-They are playing football.

2. What is this girl doing?

Lead in -. She is watching TV.
- Teacher says: “This lesson today we are going
to use the present continuous to talk about
things happening now;
”
1. Presentation (8’)
* Aim: To introduce targeted grammar of present continuous.
* Content: * Grammar : The present continuous.
* Products: Understand and how to use the present continuous.
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content

GV: Phuong Mai –Lesson Plan English 6 65

UNIT 3: MY FRIENDS
Lesson 3 : A closer look 2
* Pre – grammar. * Grammar : The present continuous
- T -- Ss (Thì hiện tại tiếp diễn)

+ We use the present continuous for

- Teacher draws students’ attention to the actions happening now.
form of the sentences from chatting and Example: - She’s talking.
ask them whether they know the target - They’re not talking.
tense. * Form: S + am/ is/ are + V-ing
- Teacher provides or confirms the answers + We can use the present continuous with
and lead in the grammar focus of the lesson: now, at present, or at the moment.
- T explains the usage and the form. Example:
- Ss listen and copy down. - I’m doing my homework at present.
- A: Are you reading now?
B: Yes, I am

2. Practice (18’)

Task 1 + Task 2 (8’)

* Aims: To help students get to know the use of present continuous.
To help Ss practise with the correct form of the present continuous.
* Content: practice the present continuous.
* Products: Students write the correct answers key on the board.
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
Task 1:T –Ss : Ss- Ss Task 1: Put the verbs in the brackets in
- Teacher has students complete Ex. 1 +2 the present continuous.
(p. 29). * Answer key:
- Teacher then asks students to exchange 1. is reading
their textbooks to check their friends’ 2. are playing
answers. 3. isn’t making
- T reminds Ss to pay attention 4. am going
to the subject of each sentence. 5. are; talking
- Some Ss read aloud their
answers. – T checks and
confirms the correct ones. Task 2. Look at the pictures. Write
sentences like the example. Use positive
- T ssks Ss to look at the pictures and briefly or negative present continous verbs
describe what the person is / people are * Answer key:
doing.
- T asks ss to write sentences, using positive 1. Nam and Ba are not / aren’t eating ice
or negative present continuous verbs. cream.
Ss write sentences and compare their 2. Lan and Trang are taking photos.
answers. 3. Ha is / Ha’s writing a letter.
T invites some Ss to write their answers on 4. Duong and Hung are not / aren’t playing
the board. badminton.
- T checks and confirms the 5. Phong is not / isn’t drawing a picture.
correct ones.

Task 3: (7’)

GV: Phuong Mai –Lesson Plan English 6 66

* Aims: To give students opportunities to use present continuous correctly in context.
* Content: Look at the pictures. Ask and answer
* Products: Work in pairs. Play a game : lucky number ( Ask and answer correctly)
* Organization
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
Task 2: T - Ss, Ss - Ss Task 3: Work in pairs. Look at the
- Teacher has students work by playing game pictures. Ask and answer
: Lucky number.
-.
1 2 3 4 Answer key:
1. Is your friend swimming?
5 6 7 8 – Yes, he is.
2. Are they listening to music?
– No, they aren’t. (They’re / They are
- Class is divided into 2 groups. having a picnic.)
- Teacher prepares 7 numbers which includes 3. Is Mi playing the piano?
5 questions in the textbook, and 2 lucky – No, she isn’t.
numbers. (She’s / She is doing karate.)
- Each team takes turns and chooses a 4. Are they learning English?
number and answers the question behind – Yes, they are.
the number. If the team answers the 5. Are your friends cycling to school?
question correctly, they will get 1 point. If – No, they aren’t. (They’re / They are
the team chooses the lucky number, they walking to school.)
get 1 point without answering the question
and may choose another number.

Task 4: (3’)
* Aims: To help Ss practise using the present continuous.
* Content: Mime game
* Products: Ask and answer in groups correctly.
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
* T-Ss, Ss-Ss Task 4: Mime game:
-
* Characters. Take tums to mime different
actions. Others guess what you are doing. Example:
- Have Ss play the game in groups. Move A: Are you dancing?
around to observe and provide help if needed. B: No, I'm not.
- Make sure Ss use English when they play C: Are you looking for something?
the game. B: Yes, l am
4:Production (5’)
* Aims: To help students distinguish and use correctly present simple and present
continuous.
* Content: Put the verbs in brackets in the present simple or present continuous
* Products: Know signals of 2 tenses. And write their correct answers on the board.
* Organization:

Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content

T - Ss, Ss – Ss

- Have Ss read the Remember! box in the

* signals of the present simple (every day,
GV: Phuong Mai –Lesson Plan English 6 67
book. every afternoon, always, usually, etc.)
- Ask Ss to give the form and usage of the * signals of the present continuous (now,
present simple. at the moment, at present, etc.).
- Ask them about the signals used with the Task 5. Put the verbs in brackets in the
present simple and the present continuous present simple or present continuous.
- Ask Ss to do this exercise individually and => Answer:
then compare their answers with a classmate. 1. doesn't walk/ cycles 2. is he playing
- Invite some Ss to write their answers on the 3. Does.... study
board. Confirm the correct answers. 4. am writing 5. isn't doing/ is
- reading

5. Consolidation (3’)
* Aim: To consolidate what students have learnt in the lesson.
* Content: summarize the main content in the lesson.
* Products: Ss say what students have learnt in the lesson.
* Organization:

Teacher’s and Ss’ activities Content

Teacher asks students to talk about what they - Grammar: the present continuous
have learnt in the lesson. - revise the present simple
- distinguish between present simple and
present continuous
4. Homework (2’)
* Aim: To revise the knowledge that students have gained in this lesson and prepare the
new lesson
* Content: Review the lesson and prepare for the next lesson and do exersie in the
workbbook
* Products: Students’ textbook and workbook
* Organization:

Teacher’s and Ss’ activities Content

- T reminds Ss to do homework and prepare - Do exercises in the workbook.
the new lesson. - Prepare lesson 4 ( communication)

Planning date:
Week: UNIT 3: MY FRIENDS
Period: Lesson 4 : Communication

I. OBJECTIVES:
By the end of the lesson, students will be able to ask and answer about people’s appearance and
personalities and practice to talk about people’s appearance and personalities.
II. LANGUAGE ANALYSIS
1.Knowledge: -
* Vocab: friends lexical items
* Grammar: The present continuous.
2. Skills: Speaking , reading and writing

GV: Phuong Mai –Lesson Plan English 6 68

3. Attitude: To teach SS to work hard, love their friends
4. Competences : develop their language skills, as well as communication, summarizing abilities,
…
III. MATERIALS
* Preparation:
1. Teacher: Text books , pictures, planning , …
- Grade 6 textbook, Unit 3, communication
- Smart TV/Pictures, sets of word cards
- sachmem.vn
2. Students: Text books, notebooks, posters, ….
IV. PROCEDURES : (STAGES)
1.Warm-up (5’)
* Aim: To revise some about appearance and personality and to introduce the lesson and to lead
in the lesson.
* Content: game- pelmanism ( some adj about appearance and personality).
* Products: Play a game in groups. ( choose correct words)
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
* Warm up * Game: Pelmanism
- Teacher divides the class into 2 teams. Ex:
- Teacher put 12 sets of numbers, one includes
word and the meaning of words. 1 Kind
- Members from two teams choose the pair of
number .
- The group with the most correct word will be
the winner Tốt bụng 5
 Lead in
These are some adj about appearance and
personalities and today we are going to learn:
“How to ask and answer about people’s
appearance and personalities”.
2. Presentation (10’)
* EVERYDAY ENGLISH
Task 1: (5’)
* Aim: To introduce question to ask about people appearance and personalities.
* Content: Listen and read the dialogue.
* Products: Role play and practise.
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
Task 1:T –Ss Task 1: Listen and read the dialogue between
- Play the recording for students to listen and Linda and Mi. Payattention to the highlighted
read the dialogue between Linda and Mi at questions.
the same time. Audio script:
- Ask students to pay attention to the Linda: What does your best friend look like?
highlighted questions. Mi: She's short with long black hair. She has
- Have students practise the dialogue in pairs. bright brown eyes.
 Call some pairs to practise the dialogue in Linda:What's she like?
front of the class. Mi: She's very kind and creative.
* Notes:
- Elicit the structure : - to ask about appearance (What does your best
- T has Ss copy down the notes: friend look like?
GV: Phuong Mai –Lesson Plan English 6 69
- to ask about personality (What's she like?)
3. Practice (5’)
Task 2: (5’)
* Aims: To practice talking about appearance and personalities.
* Content: To make similar dialogues.
* Products: Role play and practise in front of the class
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
Task 2:T –Ss : Ss- Ss Task 2: Work with a classmate. Ask him / her
- Ask Ss to work in pairs to about his / her best friend. Remember to use the
make similar dialogues about two questions highlighted in 1.
their best friend, using the Tuan: What does your best friend look like?
questions learnt. Hoa : She’s (He’s)………………………….
Call on some pairs to She(he) has bright brown eyes.
practise in front of the class. Tuan: What’s she like?
Hoa : She’s( He’s)………………………………
Task 3: (5’)
* Aims: To provide Ss with some input and set the scene for other activities.
* Content: Read the text about Vinh and John and find some adj to describe them
* Products: Read and understand the content of the text; say some adj aloud.
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
Task 3: T - Ss, Ss – Ss Task 3: Read about these students in 4Teen
. Introduce the two friends Vinh and John magazine. Use one or two adjectives to describe
to Ss. them.
- Ask them to read about the students and
discuss with their classmates to choose * Suggested answers:
one or two adjectives to describe them. - Vinh: clever, hard-working
- Tell Ssto underline the words that help - John: creative, kind
them decide which adjectives to use for
each friend.
4. Production (8’)
Task 4:(5’)
Date of birth and personality
* Aims: To introduce the concept of star sign to Ss.
* Content: Read the descriptions about date of birth and personality
* Product: Work in pairs and guess personality depend on his/ her birthday.
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
Task 4: T - Ss, Ss – Ss Task 4: Read the descriptions in pairs and find out
- Teacher tell students that each person if they match your friend’s personalities
has a star sign, depending on his / her
birthday, and the star sign may decide a
person’s personality.
- - Ask students to read the descriptions
and check if they match the friends in
Ex. 3. Students can refer to the answers
to Activity 3 that have been written on
the board.
Then teacher asks students to work in
pairs and compare the descriptions.
GV: Phuong Mai –Lesson Plan English 6 70
Task(5’)
* Aims: To help students get used to talking about people’s appearance and personalities
* Content: Share your opinion within a group
* Products: Students write perfect sentences on the posters .
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
Task 5: T - Ss, Ss - Ss Task 5: : Discussion: Read the descriptions in Ex.
- Students work in groups and read the 4. Share your opinion within a group
descriptions in 4. They write down their
ideas to complete the three sentences in My birthday is …
the book. It’s true that …
- Students work in groups to share their It isn’t true that …
answers.
- Teacher invites some students to share
their opinion with the class.
5. Consolidation (3’)
* Aims: To consolidate what students have learnt in the lesson.
* Content: Summarize the content of the lesson
* Products: Say aloud what students have learnt .
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
Teacher asks students to talk about what - ask and answer about people’ appearance and
they have learnt in the lesson. personalities.
- guess personality depend on date of birth.
6. Homework (2’)
* Aim: To revise the knowledge that students have gained in this lesson. And prepare for the next
lesson: Skills 1.
* Content: Review the lesson and prepare for the next lesson and do exersie in the workbbook
* Products: Students’ textbook and workbook
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’ activities Content
- T reminds Ss to do homework and - revise the old lesson.
prepare the new lesson. - Prepare lesson 5 ( skills 1)

Planning date:
GV: Phuong Mai –Lesson Plan English 6 71
Week: UNIT 3: MY FRIENDS
Period: Lesson 5 : Skills 1

I. OBJECTIVES:
By the end of the lesson, students will be able to read for specific information about friends and
summer camps; talk about friends and summer camps.
II. LANGUAGE ANALYSIS
1. Knowledge:
* Vocab: superb (adj); perfect (adj) ; leadership (n ); field trip (n);….
* Grammar: The simple present.
2. Skills: Speaking , reading
3. Attitude: To teach SS to work hard, love their friends.
4. Competences : Co-operation, self- study, friend.develop their language skills,
B. Preparation:
III. MATERIALS
* Preparation:
1. Teacher: Text books , pictures, planning , …
- Grade 6 textbook, Unit 3, skills 1
- Smart TV/Pictures, sets of word cards
- sachmem.vn
2. Students: Text books, notebooks, posters, ….
IV. PROCEDURES : (STAGES)
1. Warm-up (5’)
* Aim: To introduce the topic of reading and To lead in the lesson about Skills 1.
* Content: Chatting: some questions about going camping.
* Products: Students answer the questions individually.
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
- T- Ss * Play a game : Chatting
- Teachers asks students some questions 1. Do you like to go camping?
about go camping. 2. Where do you like to camp?
- Students answer the questions 3. Who do you like to go with?
4. What things will you bring?
And then lead in the new lesson. 5. What skills do you need to have?

Task 1: Lead in questions: Look at the

- T asks Ss look at the advertisement above advertisement, discuss in pairs and answer.
and answer the questions. 1. Who is the superb summer camp for?
- Ss answer individually. 2. What can people do at this summer camp?
* Suggested answers:
1. It’s for kids between 10 and 15 years old.
2. They can play sports and games, draw pictures,
play music, learn life skills, go on field trips, etc.

2. Presentation (5’)
* Aim:. To provide students with some lexical items before reading the text.
* Content: Learn some vocab related the topic.
* Products: Read and understand the meaning of words.
* Organization:

Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content

GV: Phuong Mai –Lesson Plan English 6 72
T –Ss : * VOCABULARY:
- Pre teach vocabulary - superb (adj) : tuyệt vời
- Teacher use different techniques to teach - perfect (adj) : hoàn hảo
vocab (pictures, situation, …..) - sporty (adj) : yêu thể thao
- Repeat in chorus and individually - leadership (n): sự lãnh đạo
- Copy all the words - ield trip (n) : chuyến đi thực địa

* Checking vocab: < Rub out and

remmember
3. While -reading (10’)

Task 2: (3’)
* Aims: To practice the targeted language (adjectives) and the background knowledge.
* Content: Read the email and decide the sentences T or F
* Products: Students work in pairs and say the correct key.
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
Task 2:T –Ss : Ss- Ss Task 2: : Read the email and decide the sentences
- Ask students how to do the exercise. T or F.
Instruct them to do the exercise if needed Answer key:
(e.g. reading the sentences, underlining 1. F (They speak English only.)
the key words, locating the key words in 2. F (He has three.)
the text, deciding whether the sentences 3. F (Jimmy likes taking photos.)
are true or false). 4. T
- Teacher ask students to note where they 5. T
found the information that helped them
complete the activity.
- Have students work in pairs and compare
their answers before having them discuss
as a class

4. Post-Reading + pre - speaking

Task 3: (5’)
* Aims: To help Ss explain how the Superb Summer Camp is suitable for certain students.
* Content: Read the text about the three students and do the task.
* Products: Students’ correct answers on the posters. (team work)
* Organization :
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
Task 3: T - Ss, Ss – Ss Task 3: Work in groups. Read about the three
- Have Ss lookat the advertisement for students below. Is the Super Summer Camp
the Superb Summer Camp again and suitable for all of them? Why / Why not?
underline the requirements for the
students if they want to join the camp * Suggested answers:
(e.g. between 10 and 15 years old; all 1. The camp is suitable for her because it suits her age
in English, etc.) and the types of and she can use English. She can also practise her
activity students can do at the camp. creativity at the camp.
- Teacher asks students to read the 2. The camp does not seem to suit An. He may be too
information about the three students Mi, old for the camp and he can’t speak English.
An and Vy. 3. The camp suits Vy. It suits her age and it can help
- Instruct students to underline the features her improve her English.
of each student and compare these with
GV: Phuong Mai –Lesson Plan English 6 73
the information stated in the
advertisement.
- Teacher asks them to work in groups and
decide if the Superb Summer Camp is
suitable for these students and explain
why. Invite students from different
groups to share their answers.
5. production (3’)
Task 4:
* Aims: To help Ss explain how the Superb Summer Camp suits them.
To provide an opportunity for students to practise speaking.
* Content: Do you want to go to this kind of camp? Why / Why not?
* Products: Students’ answers ( give personal opinion)
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
- Teacher has students think about Task 4: Think about yourself. Do you want to go
themselves and decide if the camp suits to this kind of camp? Why / Why not?
them. Encourage them to give the reasons Example: I want to go to this camp because I can
for their answers. speak English there.
- Teacher asks students to work in groups => Answer: I want to go to this camp because I'm
and share their opinions. Move around to good at English and I love sports
observe and provide help if needed.
- Call on some Ss to share their answers.

7. Consolidation (2’)
* Aims: To consolidate what students have learnt in the lesson.
* Content: Ss summarize what they have learnt with the two skills.
* Products: Students say what they have learnt with the two skills in front of the class.
* Organization:

Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content

- Teacher asks students to talk about what - some vocab
they have learnt in the lesson. - read the advertisement about the Superb Summer
Camp
-……….
8. Homework (2’)
* Aim: To revise the knowledge that students have gained in this lesson.
* Content: Review the lesson and prepare for the next lesson .
* Products: Students’ textbook and workbook
* Organization:

- Teacher asks students to prepare the new - learn by heart vocab.

lesson - Prepare for the next lesson: Unit 3-Skills 2.

GV: Phuong Mai –Lesson Plan English 6 74

Planning date:
Week: UNIT 3: MY FRIENDS
Period: Lesson 6: Skills 2

I. OBJECTIVES:
By the end of the lesson, students will be able to listen for specific information about best friends
and write a diary entry about best friends.
II. LANGUAGE ANALYSIS
1. Knowledge:
* Vocab: revise some words
* Grammar: The present continuous.
2. Skills: Listening, speaking , reading and writing
3. Attitude: To teach SS to work hard, love their friends
4. Competences: Co-operation, self- study; Students will developed listening and writing skills.
III. MATERIALS
* Preparation:
1. Teacher: Text books , pictures, planning , …
- Grade 6 textbook, Unit 3, Skills 2
- Smart TV/Pictures.
- sachmem.vn
2. Students: Text books, notebooks, posters, ….
IV. PROCEDURES : (STAGES)
1.Warm –up (5’)
* Aim: To review the vocabulary.
* Content: Game ( Jumbled words)
* Products: Students go to the board and rearrange words.
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
* Warm up (Individual work) * Game: Jumbled words
- Teacher sticks some jumbled words onto the LFIEDRNY
board. TACIEV
- Students raise hands to answer. TOFCNDITEN
- Ss go to the board and write words UNFNY
- T feedbacks .
RCUFEAL
* Answer key:
1. ACTIVE 2. FRIENDLY 3. FUNNY
4. CAREFUL 5. CONFIDENT

1. Pre-Listening (5’)

Task 1: (5’)
* Aim: To help students recall knowledge of present continuous.
* Content: Look at the pictures. Guess the activity.
* Products: Students say their prediction aloud . (individual work)
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
- Have Ss look at the pictures and Task 1: Look at the pictures. Guess the
answer the question. Elicit the answers activity. Check as a class discussion.
from Ss. * Answer key:
a. They are talking.
GV: Phuong Mai –Lesson Plan English 6 75
- Teacher plays the recording. Students b. They are playing football.
listen and check their predictions. c. They are walking

3. While -listening ( 10’)

Task 2 (5’)
* Aims: To develop students listening skills.
* Content: Listen and find out who is Lan and Chi.
* Products: Note down to describe the two girls. Underline keywords ( work indepently)
* Organization:

Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content

Task 2: T - Ss, Ss - Ss Task 2: Work in pairs. Note down to describe
- Teacher asks students to look at the the two girls. Underline keywords. Listen and
pictures and note down some descriptions find out who is Lan and Chi.
about the 2 girls.
Teacher asks students to underline the *Descriptions
keywords  Tell students to pay attention
to the key words while listening

Teacher plays the recording.

Teacher asks students to listen and choose * Listen and decide who is Lan and Chi
the answers.
Teacher asks students to compare their * Answer key:
answers with the prediction made Lan is the girl wearing a red and white jacket and
previously. a red cap.
Teacher checks students’ answers as a Chi is the girl wearing a white T-shirt and a blue
class. skirt.

Task 3: (5’)
* Aims: To help students develop listening skill for specific information (gap-filling)..
* Content: Listen again and fill in the blanks.
* Products: Work in pair and write the correct answers key on the board.
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
- T-Ss, Ss-Ss( work group) Task 3: Listen again and fill in the blanks.
- Teacher asks students to read the * Answer key:
questions carefully and determine what 1. 6A
information they need to fill the gaps 2. black; mouth
(numbers, words). 3. friendly
- Teacher plays the recording for students 4. big
to fill the gaps. 5. kind
- Teacher asks them to swap their answers * Audio script:
in pairs before checking their answers as a Mi: My best friend is Quyen. She studies with me
class. in class 6A. She’s tall and slim. She has short
black hair and a small mouth. She’s very active
and friendly. She likes playing sports and has
many friends.
Look, she’s playing football over there!
Minh: Chi is my best friend. We’re in class 6B.
She’s short with long black hair and a big nose.
GV: Phuong Mai –Lesson Plan English 6 76
I like her because she’s kind to me. She helps me
with my English. She’s also hard-working. She
always does her homework before class. Look,
she’s going to the library.

4. Post-Listening (3’)
* Aims: To develop students’ speaking skill, using the available information and their
background knowledge.
* Content: Talk about your friends.
* Products: Say 2 words about appearance and personalities of the other 2 members in groups.
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Giaoandethitienganh.info Content
- T – Ss ; Ss- Ss * Talk about your friends:
- Students work in groups of 3.
- Teacher asks students to say 2 words (e.g. name, appearance, personality and the
about appearance and personalities of the reason why they like him/ her).
other 2 members and ask them if they
think it is true about them.
- -Students can add more information based
on their background knowledge.
Teacher goes around and helps if needed.
5. Pre-Writing (5’)
* Aims: To help students talk about a friend.
* Content: Ask and answer about your best friend.
* Products: Work in pairs ( ask and answer)
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
- T-Ss, Ss-Ss * Task 4: Work in pairs. Ask and answer
- Teacher asks students to work in pairs. about your best friend.
- Teacher asks students to take short notes Example:
of the answers for later use. 1. His name is Huy
- Teacher goes around and helps if needed 2. He is tall and sporty
3. He likes playing soccer and drawing
4. I like him because he is kind, he always helps
friends. Besides, he is careful, when I get sick, he
buys medicine for me

While-Writing (5’)
* Aim: To teach students how to write a diary entry about a friend.
* Content: Write a diary entry about your best friend. Cross check.
* Products: Students’ writing and cross check. (individual work)
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
- T-Ss, Ss-Ss Task 5: Write a diary entry about your best
- Ask students to write the diary entry friend. Cross check.
individually. * Model writing.
- Ask one or two students to write their My best friend is Lan. She studies with me in
entry on the board. class 6A. She’s tall and slim. She has short black
- Other students and teacher comment on hair and a small mouth. She’s very active and
the entries on the board. friendly. She likes playing sports and has many
friends. I like being with her. I hope that in the
GV: Phuong Mai –Lesson Plan English 6 77
future we’ll still be best friends.
Post-Writing (3’)
* Aim: To peer check, cross check and final check students’ writing
* Content:. Cross check students’ writing
* Products: Students’ writing on the posters.
* Organization:

Teacher’s and Ss’ activities Content

- T-Ss, Ss-Ss * Cross check students’ writing
- Teacher asks students to exchange their
textbooks to check their friends’ writing.
Teacher then gives feedback as a class
discussion.
* Consolidation (2’)
* Aim: To consolidate what students have learnt in the lesson.
* Content: summarize the content of the lesson.
* Products: A student says what she/ he has learnt in the lesson.
* Organization:

Teacher’s and Ss’ activities Content

- Teacher asks students to talk about what - Listen a passage about Mi and Minh talk about
they have learnt in the lesson. their best friends
- Write a diary entry about your best friend.

* Homework (2’)
* Aim: To revise the knowledge that students have gained in this lesson.
* Content: Review the lesson and prepare for the next lesson and do exersie in the workbbook
* Products: Students’ textbook and workbook
* Organization

- Teacher asks students to rewrite their - Rewrite the writing in the notebook.
writing in their books. - Prepare “ Looking back and project”
- Teacher asks students to prepare the new
lesson.

GV: Phuong Mai –Lesson Plan English 6 78

Planning date:
Week: UNIT 3: MY FRIENDS
Period: Lesson 7: Looking back and project

I. OBJECTIVES:
By the end of the lesson, students will be able to review the vocabulary and grammar of Unit 3 and
apply what they have learnt (vocabulary and grammar) into practice through a project.
II. LANGUAGE ANALYSIS
1. Knowledge:
* Vocab: revise some words of unit 3
* Grammar: The present simple and present continuous.
2. Skills: Speaking , reading and writing.
3. Attitude: To teach SS to work hard, love their friends.
4. Competences: Use The present simple and present continuous. Students will developed some
skills.
III. MATERIALS
* Preparation:
1. Teacher: Text books , pictures, planning , …
- Grade 6 textbook, Unit 3 , Looking back and project
- Smart TV/Pictures.
- sachmem.vn
2. Students: Text books, notebooks, posters, ….
IV. PROCEDURES : (STAGES)
1.Warm-up (5’)
* Aim: To help students revise the vocabulary items they have learnt in the unit.
* Content: Game Brainstorming( some adj about appearance and personalities)
* Products: Write correct words on the board ( team work)
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
* Warm up (Team work) * Game: * Brainstorming:
- T -Ss * Suggested answers:
- Teacher divides the board, and divides the - Appearance: tall, short, beautiful, smart, …
class into 2 big groups. Personalities: confident, careful, clever,
- Each group will be assigned a category: funny, …
APPEARANCE & PERSONALITIES
- Teacher asks students to brainstorm all
adjectives related to people’s appearance and
personalities.
- The group having the most suitable answers
is the winner.

* VOCABULARY
1. Task 1 (5’)
* Aim:To help students revise the adjectives describing people.
* Content: Choose the best options to complete the sentences.
* Products: Students say the correct key aloud ( individual work).
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
- T –Ss : Task 1: Task 1: Choose the best options to
- Teacher encourages students to complete complete the sentences. (Ex. 1, p. 34)
GV: Phuong Mai –Lesson Plan English 6 79
the task individually. * Answer key:
- Students exchange their textbook to 1. B
discuss the reasons why they are 2. A
choosing the appropriate adjectives. 3. C
- Teacher gives feedback as a class 4. A
discussion 5. C

Task 2: (5’)

* Aims: To help Ss revise the possessive case.

* Content: Answer questions about your classmates.( game: lucky number)
* Products: Students ask and answer in groups by playing game.
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
- T –Ss ; Ss – Ss Task 2: Answer questions about your
- Teacher divides the class into 2 groups. classmates.
- Teacher asks students to choose the number Game: Lucky Numbers. (Ex 2, p. 34)
and answer the questions quickly in 3
seconds. 1 2 3
- If students choose the lucky number, they 4 5 6
don’t have to answer 1. Who has long hair in your class?
- 2. Who has a small nose?
3. Who has a round face?
4. Does the classmate next to you have long
hair?
5. Does the classmate next to you have big
eyes?
6. LUCKY NUMBER

* GRAMMAR
Task 3. (5’)
* Aims: To help students revise present tenses in context
* Content: Put the verbs in the brackets in correct forms.
* Products: Students’ correct answers on the board. (individual work)
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
Task 3: T - Ss, Ss – Ss Task 3: Put the verbs in the brackets in
correct forms. (Ex. 3-4, p. 34)
- Teacher has students complete the task * Answer key:
individually. Ex. 3:
- Students exchange their textbooks to 1. are running
discuss the reasons about their choices. 2. are talking
- Students should record their original 3. are not talking / aren’t talking
answers to guide their self-assessment later. 4. are drawing
- Teacher gives feedback as a class 5. is not teaching / isn’t teaching
discussion Ex. 4:
1. are you doing; am writing / ’m writing
Ex. 4:
1. are you doing; am writing / ’m writing
2. cycles; don’t cycle; walk
GV: Phuong Mai –Lesson Plan English 6 80
3. Is he doing; is reading / ’s reading

5. Project (5’) *
* Aims: To allow students to apply what they have learnt (vocabulary and grammar) into
practice through a project.
* Content: make project “My class yearbook”
* Products: Students’ answers on the posters
* Organization:

Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content

- Teacher sets the context and asks students * My class yearbook:
to bring a photo of his/her friend to class.
- Teacher asks students to write a draft (using
the clues)
- Teacher checks and sets time for students to
make a year-book page.
- Teacher gives comments and feedback.

* Consolidation (2’)
* Aim: To consolidate what students have learnt in the lesson.
* Content: summarize the content of the lesson.
* Products: A student says the lesson’s content aloud.
* Organization:

Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content

- Teacher asks students to talk about what - revise vocabulary and grammar in unit 3
they have learnt in the lesson. - make Project: “My class yearbook”
* Homework (2’)
Aim: To revise the knowledge that students have gained in Unit 3 and To prepare for the next
lesson
* Content: Review the lesson and prepare for the next lesson and do exersie in the workbbook
* Products: Students’ textbook and workbook.
* Organization:

Teacher’s and Ss’ activities Content

- Teacher asks students to revise old lesson - Complete the project
and to do exercise in workbook. - Prepare for the next lesson: Review 1.
- Teacher asks students to complete the
project and prepare the new lesson.

GV: Phuong Mai –Lesson Plan English 6 81

Planning date:
Week: REVIEW 1 (UNITS 1+2+3)
Period: Lesson 1: Language

I. OBJECTIVES:
By the end of this review, students will be able to revise the language they have learnt and the
skills they have studied in Units 1-2-3.
II. LANGUAGE ANALYSIS
1. Knowledge:
* Vocabulary: Review vocabulary , Pronunciation in Units 1-3
* Grammar: Grammar in Units 1 - 3
2. Skills: Reading , speaking and Writing
3. Attitude: To teach Ss life skills and love their school, friends,…
4. Competences: Ss can join teamwork or social activities; Talking about activities friends often
do together.
III. MATERIALS
- Grade 6 textbook, Review ( language)
- Projector/ pictures and cards
sachmem.vn
IV. PROCEDURES : (STAGES)
1.Warm-up (5’)
* Aim: To revise the language that students have learnt in Units 1+2+3.
* Content: Memory game: finish chart which summarizes the language that students have
learnt in Units 1, 2, 3
* Products: Students’ correct answer key on the board.
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
* Warm up (Team work) * Game: Memory game
- T -Ss
- Teacher draws/sticks an unfinished chart
which summarizes the language that students
have learnt in Units 1, 2, 3 on the board.
- Teacher divides the class into 2 teams and
asks students to run in a relay to complete
the chart:

* Suggested answer:
- The team with the most correct answers will
be the winner.

GV: Phuong Mai –Lesson Plan English 6 82

* Practice (35’)
PRONUNCIATION

Task 1
* Aim: To help students review the pronunciation of the sounds learnt in Units 1-2-3: /ɑ:/
and /ʌ/; /s/ and /z/ correctly.
* Content: Choose the word whose underlined part is pronounced differently
* Products: Students say the correct answer key.
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
- T –Ss : Task 1: Choose the word whose underlined
- Teacher elicits the rules of pronouncing part is pronounced differently.
final -s if needed. .
- Students do this exercise individually * Answer key:
then share their answers with their 1. C
partners. 2. A
- Teacher gives feedback and confirms the 3. B
answers 4. A
5. B

Task 2: (5’)

* Aims: To help students review the pronunciation of the sounds /b/ and /p/ in words.
* Content: Write the names of school things and furniture in the house which begin with /b/
and /p/.
* Products: The correct words on the board
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
- T –Ss ; Ss – Ss Task 2: Write the names of school things
- Teacher organizes this task as a game. and furniture in the house which begin
- Students do this task in pairs. The pair that with /b/ and /p/.
finds the most words will go to the board
and write their answers. * Suggested answers:
- Other pairs may want to add more words. /b/
Write other words on the board. book, bag, bed…
- Teacher gives feedback and confirms the /p/
answers. pen, pencil, picture, poste…

Task 3.
VOCABULARY
GV: Phuong Mai –Lesson Plan English 6 83
* Aims: To help students review the word groups used with “play, have, do” and “study”.
* Content: Complete the words.
* Products: The correct words on the board (individual work)
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
Task 3: T - Ss, Ss – Ss Task 3: Complete the words.
- Teacher has students do this task * Answer key:
individually and then share their answers 1. English 2. homework
with their partners. 3. lunch 4. sports
- Teacher calls one or two students to write 5. badminton
their answers on the board.  play: sports, badminton
- Teacher checks and confirms the correct  have: lunch
ones.  do: homework
 study: English
Task 4.
* Aims: To help students review the personality adjectives, the words related to body parts,
rooms and types of house.
* Content: Solve the crossword puzzle.
* Products: Say the correct answer aloud. (team work)
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
Task 4: T - Ss, Ss – Ss Task 4: Solve the crossword puzzle.
-
- Teacher sticks the crossword puzzle on the * Answer key:
board. Giaoandethitienganh.info
- Teacher divides the class into 2 teams and
asks students to run in a relay to complete
the crossword puzzle.
- The team with the most correct answers
will be the winner.

Task 5
* GRAMMAR
* Aims: To help students review grammar elements taught in Units 1-2-3: prepositions of
place, possessive case and present continuous.
* Content: : Look at the picture of a classroom. Choose the best answer A, B, or C.
* Products: Students’ correct choice.
* Organization:

Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content

Task 5: T - Ss, Ss – Ss Task 5: Look at the picture of a classroom.
- Choose the best answer A, B, or C.
- Teacher has students look at the picture of a
classroom and complete the sentences.

- Students compare their answers with a

classmate.

GV: Phuong Mai –Lesson Plan English 6 84

- Teacher checks and confirms the correct
answers. * Answer key:
1. B 2. A 3. A 4. B 5. C

Task 6:
* Aims: To help Ss review the use of the present simp le and the present continuous.
* Content: : Complete the sentences with the present simple or the present continuous form of
the verbs in brackets.
* Products: Write the answers correctly on the board./ say the answers aloud
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
Task 6: T - Ss, Ss – Ss Task 6: Complete the sentences with the
present simple or the present continuous
- Teacher elicits form and usage of the form of the verbs in brackets.
present simple and the present continuous. Answer key:
- Teacher asks students to do the exercise 1. is / ’s raining
individually before calling one or two 2. do you have
students to write their answers on the board. 3. Is she studying
- Teacher checks students’ answers and asks 4. likes
them for explanation if necessary 5. is not / isn’t cooking;
is reading
* Consolidation (3’)
* Aim: To consolidate what students have learnt in the lesson.
* Content: summarize the content of the lesson.
* Products: A student says the lesson’s content aloud.
* Organization:

Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content

- Teacher asks students to talk about what - vocabulary and grammar in the lesson
they have learnt in the lesson.
* Homework (2’)
Aim: To revise the knowledge that students have gained in the lesson and To prepare for the
next lesson
* Content: Review the lesson and prepare for the next lesson and do exersie in the workbbook
* Products: Students’ textbook and workbook.
* Organization:

Teacher’s and Ss’ activities Content

- Teacher asks students to revise old lesson - Do exercise in workbook.
and to do exercise in workbook. - Prepare for the next lesson: Review
- Teacher asks students to complete the (SKILLS).
project and prepare the new lesson.

GV: Phuong Mai –Lesson Plan English 6 85

Planning date:
Week: REVIEW 1 (UNITS 1+2+3)
Period: Lesson 2: Skills

I. OBJECTIVES:
By the end of the lesson, ss will be able to:
+ Revise the language Ss they have practised from Unit 1 to Unit 3.
+ Practice doing some exercises in Skills.
II. LANGUAGE ANALYSIS
1. Knowledge:
* Vocabulary: Review vocabulary , Pronunciation in Units 1-3
* Grammar: Grammar in Units 1 - 3
2. Skills: Reading , speaking and Writing
3. Attitude: Know the importance of revision and need to study harder.
4. Competences: - Doing exercises on pronounciation, vocabulary, grammar and everyday
English.
III. MATERIALS
- Grade 6 textbook, Review ( skills ).
- Projector/ pictures and cards
sachmem.vn
IV. PROCEDURES : (STAGES)

* Warm-up (5’)
* Aim: To increase students’ interest and lead them into the lesson.
* Content: Ask some questions about penpal.
* Products: Students’ correct answers
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
* Warm up (Team work) * Chatting
- T -Ss 1. Do you have any pen pals?
- Teacher asks students some questions to lead 2. How do you communicate with your pen
them into the lesson: pal?
- Teacher lead in the reading part of the 3. Do you often write emails to your pen pal?
lesson.

* Practice (35’)
I. READING

Task 1
* Aim: To help students practise reading for specific information.
* Content: Choose A, B, or C for each blank in the email below.
* Products: The correct answers from Ss.
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
- T –Ss : Task 1: Choose A, B, or C for each blank in
- Students do these exercises individually. the email below.
-Students check their answers with their -.
partners before they give the answers to Answer key:
teacher. 1. A
- Teacher confirms the correct answers 2. C

GV: Phuong Mai –Lesson Plan English 6 86

3. C
4. B
5. B

Task 2:
* Aims: To help students practise reading for general information.
* Content: Read the text and answer the questions.
* Products: The correct answers from Ss. ( individual work)
* Organization:

Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content

- T –Ss ; Ss – Ss Task 2: Read the text and answer the
- Students do these exercises individually. questions.
- Students check their answers with their -.
partners before they give the answers to *Answer key:
teacher. 1. It’s in a quiet place not far from the city
- Teacher confirms the correct answers center.
2. They are hard-working and kind.
3. They are helpful and friendly.
4. There are five clubs.
5. Because it’s a good school.

II. SPEAKING
Task 3
* Aims: To help students practise asking and answering about what they like and dislike about
their school
and the reasons why.
* Content: Interview two of your classmates about what they like and dislike about your
school. Report their answers.
* Products: students’ ideas in goups
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
Task 3: T - Ss, Ss – Ss Task 3: Interview two of your classmates
about what they like and dislike about your
- Teacher has students work in groups of school. Report their answers.
three. One interviews the other two about
what they like and dislike about their school
and the reasons why.
- Teacher tells students to write their group
members’ answers in their notebooks and - Example:
report them to the class. Nam:
- Teacher summarizes students’ ideas. + He likes the friendly teachers and helpful
friends. + They help him a lot with school
work.
- The school yard is quite small, so he can’t
play many games with friends.

GV: Phuong Mai –Lesson Plan English 6 87

III. LISTENING
Task 4.
* Aims: To help students review listening for specific information.
* Content: Listen and fill each blank with one word.
* Products: students’ correct answers .
* Organization:

Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content

Task 4: T - Ss, Ss – Ss Task 4: An and Mi are talking on the phone.
- Teacher has students read the sentences. Listen and fill each blank with one word.
-Teacher plays the recording for the first Answer key:
time. 1. home
-Teacher asks students to listen and complete 2. plants
the sentences. Ask for their answers and 3. living
writes them on the board. 4. sleeping
-Teacher plays the recording the second time 5. TV
for students to check their answers. * Audio script:
-Teacher checks students’ answers. An: Why is it so quiet, Mi? Are you home
-Teacher plays the recording the last time if alone?
necessary, stopping at different places where Mi: No. Everybody is here, but they are in
students got the wrong answers. different rooms.
An: Where’s your mum? Is she cooking in the
- kitchen?

IV. WRITING
Task 5
* Aims: To help students complete a guided paragraph of 40-45 words about a student’s family
member.
* Content: Write an email of about 50 words to your friend. Tell him/ her about a family
member.
* Products: Students’ perfect writing.
* Organization:

Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content

Task 5: T - Ss, Ss – Ss Task 5: Write an email of about 50 words to
your friend. Tell him/ her about a family
- Teacher elicits the parts of an email. member. Use these questions as cues.
- Teacher asks students to discuss and answer Example:
the questions in pairs. 1. My mom.
- Teacher then has them write their emails 2. She is 40 years old.
individually. 3. She's tall and beautiful with long black hair.
- Teacher asks one student to write the email 4. She is caring because she always takes good
on the board. care of me. She prepares food and uniform for
- Other students and teacher comment on me to go to school every morning. She's also
the email on the board. kind because she usually helps the neighbours
- Teacher then collects some emails to give whenever they get trouble.
feedback at home.
Hi Hoa,
Thanks for your email. Now I’ll tell you about
my mother. She is 40 years old. She's tall and
beautiful with long black hair. She is caring
GV: Phuong Mai –Lesson Plan English 6 88
because she always takes good care of me. She
prepares food and uniform for me to go to
school every morning. She's also kind because
she usually helps the neighbours whenever they
get trouble.
Write me soon and tell me about a member in
your family.
Best,

* Consolidation (3’)
* Aim: To consolidate what students have learnt in the lesson.
* Content: Summarize the content of the lesson.
* Products: A student says the lesson’s content aloud.
* Organization:

Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content

- Teacher asks students to talk about what - 4 skills
they have learnt in the lesson.
* Homework (2’)
Aim: To revise the knowledge that students have gained in the lesson and To prepare for the
next lesson
* Content: Review the lesson and prepare for the next lesson and do exersie in the workbbook
* Products: Students’ textbook and workbook.
* Organization:

Teacher’s and Ss’ activities Content

- Teacher asks students to revise old lesson - revise the old lesson.
and to do exercise in workbook. - Do exercise in workbook.
- Teacher asks students to complete the - Prepare for the next lesson: Unit 4 – lesson1
project and prepare the new lesson.

GV: Phuong Mai –Lesson Plan English 6 89

Planning date:
Week:
Period: THE 1st MIDDLE TERM TEST

I. Objectives.By doing the test, Ss will be able to get

1: Knowledge:
- Vocabulary: Lexical items related to the topic: My new school , My house and My friends
- Grammar: Tenses, prepositions of place, suggestions, ...
2: Skills: Listening, reading and writing skills.
3: Attitude: Do the test in earnest.
4: Capacity: Individual capacity, competency for applying knowledge in doing test
II. Preparation.
1: Teacher: Questions,
2: Students: Good preparation for test.
III. Test.
SECTION A: LISTENING: (2,5pts)
Part I.Listen to Mai talking about her house and tick (✓) T (True) or F (False).(1,25 pts)
T F
1. There are four people in Mai’s family. (NB)
2.Mai’s house has seven rooms. (NB)
3. The living room is next to the kitchen.(TH)
4.In her bedroom, there’s a clock on the wall. (TH)
5. She often listens to music in her bedroom. (VD)
Part II. Listen to the tape and choose the correct answer A or B(1,25 pts)
1. Janet's favourite teacher is her_______teacher. (NB)
A. maths B. science
2. Today Janet ________ her uniform. (NB)
A is wearing B. isn’t wearing
3. Janet studies__________ for two hours a week. (TH)
A. English B. Vietnamese
4. Janet usually does her homework__________. (TH)
A. in the library B. at home
5. Her class is going to have a biology lesson___________ .(VD)
A. on a farm B. in the classroom
SECTION B: LANGUAGE (2,5pts)
Part I. Phonetics (0,5pt)
Choose the word whose underlined part is pronounced differently from the others.
1. A. wants B. plays C. brings D. buys (NB)
2. A. study B. lunch C. sun D. computer (NB)
Part II. Vocabulary and grammar:
Choose the best answer: (2,0pts)
GV: Phuong Mai –Lesson Plan English 6 90
(NB)1. Mai is very................... . She learns things quickly and easily.
A. kind B. shy C. caring D. clever
(TH)2. My parents ................... work on Saturdays and Sundays.
A. doesn’t B. don’t C. isn’t D. aren’t
(TH)3.Trang always ………… up early so she is never late for school.
A. get B. gets C.to get D. getting
(TH)4. "Is there a TV in the living room ?"- ...................
A. Yes, there is B. Yes, there are C. Yes, there isn’t D. Yes, there aren’t
(VD)5. They ................... football at the moment.
A. are playing B. plays C. play D. to play
(VD)6. – This is …………… computer.
A. of Trung B. Trung’s C. Trungs’ D. for Trung
(NB)7.She is a good student. She ___________ her homework on time
A. usually do B. do usually C. usually does D. does usually
(TH)8. Mai is sitting ................... Lan and Bao.
A. in front B. between C. on D. next
SECTION C: READING: (2,5pts)
Part I.Read the following passage and choose the best answer for each blank.
My name is Phong. I am 11 years old and I (1)…………… in grade 6. I live in a house near a lake
in the countryside. There is a rice paddy opposite my house, too. There is a small yard
(2) .................. of my house. There are tall trees behind my house, behind the tall trees, there are
(3)……... To the (4) .................. of my house, there is a well. To the left of my house, there is a big
garden. There (5) .................. flowers in the garden.
(NB) 1. A. am B. is C. are D. be
(NB) 2. A. in front B. next C. behind D. under
(NB) 3. A. mountain B. a mountain C. an mountain D. mountains
(TH) 4. A. front B. left C. near D. right
(VD) 5. A. is B. are C. have D. has
Part II. Read the text and write True (T) or False (F) ( 1,25 pts)
Hi. I am Lan. I would like to tell you about my new school. It is in a quiet place not far from the
city center. It has three buildings and a large yard. This year there are 26 classes with more than
1.000 students in my school. Most students are hard-working and serious. The school has about 40
teachers. They are all helpful and friendly. My school has different clubs: Dance, English, Arts,
Football and Basketball. I like English, so I joined the English club. I love my school because it is
a good school.
Sentences T/F
1. Lan’s new school is in a noisy place near the city
center. (NB)
2. Lan’s school has three buildings and twenty classes.
(NB)
3. The teachers are helpful and friendly(NB)
4. There are five clubs in Lan’s new school.(TH)
5. Lan doesn’t like English.(VD)
SECTION D: WRITING: (2,5pts)
Part I.
a. Rearrange these following given words to make meaningful sentences.(0,5pt)
1. do/ get up/ What time/ in the morning ?/ you/ (NB)
________________________________
2. My mother/ at 6.30 / every day./ goes/ to work / (NB)
___________________________________
b. Find the mistakes, choose A,B,C or D(1,0pt)

GV: Phuong Mai –Lesson Plan English 6 91

1. He live in Liverpool with his parents (TH)
A B C D
2.Mary doesn’t likes listening to music in English (TH)
A B C D
3.He is studying Maths in his room every day. (TH)
A B C D
4. There is 2 pictures in my bedroom. (TH)
A B C D
c. Rewrite the sentence without changing the meaning.(0,5pt)
1. There are 43 students in my class .(VDC)
=> My class has ________________________________.
2. How about playing football ?(VDC)
=> Let’s _________________________________.
Part II. Write sentences, using the suggested words/ phrases given (0,5 pt)
1. She /read / a book / now. (VDC)
………………………………………………………………………
2. There/be/ three/ bedrooms/ my new house. (VDC)
………………………………………………………………………
___________________________________________

GV: Phuong Mai –Lesson Plan English 6 92

Planning date:
Week:
Period: CHECK THE MID-TERM TEST

I. Objectives. By doing the test, Ss will be able to get

1: Knowledge:
- Lexical items related to the topic: My new school , My house and My friends
- Grammar: Tenses, prepositions of place, suggestions, ...
2: Skills: Listening , reading and writing skills.
3: Attitude: Do the test in earnest.
4: Capacity: Individual capacity, competency for applying knowledge in doing the test.
II. Preparation.
1: Teacher: Questions.
2: Students: Good preparation for test.
III. Methods. Controllability
IV: Procedure.
1: Class organization.
- Greetings.
- Checking attendance:
2. Comment the result of the test:
* Good points:
* Bad points:
3. Giving the answer key to the test:
SECTION A: LISTENING: (2,5pts)
Part I.Listen to Mai talking about her house and tick (✓) T (True) or F (False).(1,25 pts)
(5 items x 0,25 = 1.25 pts)
T F
1. There are four people in Mai’s family. (NB) F
2.Mai’s house has seven rooms. (NB) F
3. The living room is next to the kitchen.(TH) T
4.In her bedroom, there’s a clock on the wall. (TH) T
5. She often listens to music in her bedroom. (VD) F
*Tape script
My name's Mai. I live in a town house in Ha Noi. I live with my parents. There are six rooms in our
house: a living room, a kitchen, two bedrooms, and two bathrooms. I love our living room the best
because it's bright. It's next to the kitchen. I have my own bedroom. It's small but beautiful. There's a
bed, a desk, a chair, and a bookshelf. It also has a big window and a clock on the wall. I often read
books in my bedroom.
Part II. Listen to the tape and choose the correct answer A or B (1,25 pts)
1. Janet's favourite teacher is her_______teacher. (NB)
GV: Phuong Mai –Lesson Plan English 6 93
A. maths B. science
2. Today Janet ________ her uniform. (NB)
A is wearing B. isn’t wearing
3. Janet studies__________ for two hours a week. (TH)
A. English B. Vietnamese
4. Janet usually does her homework__________. (TH)
A. in the library B. at home
5. Her class is going to have a biology lesson___________ .(VD)
A. on a farm B. in the classroom
*Tape script
Hi. My name's Janet. I'm eleven years old. I'm now in year 6 at Palmer School. I like it here. My
classmates are friendly. The teachers at my school are nice and very helpful, and my favourite
teacher is Mrs. Smith. She teaches us maths. I have two hours to study Vietnamese every week. I
usually do my homework in the library. We wear our uniforms every day, but today we aren't.
We're going to have a biology lesson on a farm.
SECTION B :LANGUAGE (2,5pts) (Tỉ lệ 25%)
(10 tems x 0,25 = 2,5 pts)
Part I. Phonetics (0,5pt)
Choose the word whose underlined part is pronounced differently from the others.
2. A.wants B. plays C. brings D. buys (NB)
2. A. study B. lunch C. sun D. computer (NB)

Part II. Vocabulary and grammar:

Choose the best answer: (2,0pts)
(NB)1. Mai is very................... . She learns things quickly and easily.
A. kind B. shy C. caring D. clever
(TH)2. My parents ................... work on Saturdays and Sundays.
A. doesn’t B. don’t C. isn’t D. aren’t
(TH)3.Trang always ………… up early so she is never late for school.
A. get B. gets C.to get D. getting
(TH)4. "Is there a TV in the living room ?"- ...................
A. Yes, there is B. Yes, there are C. Yes, there isn’t D. Yes, there aren’t
(VD)5. They ................... football at the moment.
A. are playing B. plays C. play D. to play
(VD)6. – This is …………… computer.
A. of Trung B. Trung’s C. Trungs’ D. for Trung
(NB)7.She is a good student. She ___________ her homework on time
A. usually do B. do usually C. usually does D. does usually
(TH)8. Mai is sitting ................... Lan and Bao.
A. in front B. between C. on D. next
SECTION C: READING: (2,5pts) (Tỉ lệ 25%)
(10 items x 0,25 = 2,5 pts)
Part I.Read the following passage and choose the best answer for each blank.
My name is Phong. I am 11 years old and I (1)…………… in grade 6. I live in a house near a lake
in the countryside. There is a rice paddy opposite my house, too. There is a small yard
(2) .................. of my house. There are tall trees behind my house, behind the tall trees, there are
(3)……... To the (4) .................. of my house, there is a well. To the left of my house, there is a big
garden. There (5) .................. flowers in the garden.
(NB) 1. A. am B. is C. are D. be
(NB) 2. A. in front B. next C. behind D. under
(NB) 3. A. mountain B. a mountain C. an mountain D. mountains
(TH) 4. A. front B. left C. near D. right
GV: Phuong Mai –Lesson Plan English 6 94
(VD) 5. A. is B. are C. have D. has

Part II. Read the text and write True (T) or False (F) ( 1,25 pts)
Hi. I am Lan. I would like to tell you about my new school. It is in a quiet place not far from the
city center. It has three buildings and a large yard. This year there are 26 classes with more than
1.000 students in my school. Most students are hard-working and serious. The school has about 40
teachers. They are all helpful and friendly. My school has different clubs: Dance, English, Arts,
Football and Basketball. I like English, so I joined the English club. I love my school because it is
a good school.
Sentences T/F
1. Lan’s new school is in a noisy place near the city F
center. (NB)
2. Lan’s school has three buildings and twenty classes. F
(NB)
3. The teachers are helpful and friendly(NB) T
4. There are five clubs in Lan’s new school.(TH) T
5. Lan doesn’t like English.(VD) F

SECTION D :WRITING: (2,5pts) (Tỉ lệ 25%)

(10 items x 0,25 = 2,5 pts)
Part I.
a. Rearrange these following given words to make meaningful sentences.(0,5pt)
1. do/ get up/ What time/ in the morning ?/ you/ (NB)
What time do you get up in the morning?
2. My mother/ at 6.30 / every day./ goes/ to work / (NB)
My mother goes to work at 6.30 every day.
b. Find the mistakes, choose A,B,C or D(1,0pt)
1. He live in Liverpool with his parents (TH)
A B C D
2.Mary doesn’t likes listening to music in English (TH)
A B C D
3.He is studying Maths in his room every day. (TH)
A B C D
4. There is 2 pictures in my bedroom. (TH)
A B C D

c. Rewrite the sentence without changing the meaning.(0,5pt)

1. There are 43 students in my class .(VDC)
=> My class has 43 students.
2. How about playing football ?(VDC)
=> Let’s play football.
Part II. Write sentences, using the sugAgested words/ phrases given (0,5 pt)
1. She /read / a book / now. (VDC)
She is reading a book now.
2.There/ be/ three/ bedrooms/ my new house(VDC)
There are three bedrooms in my new house
_______________________________________________________________________

GV: Phuong Mai –Lesson Plan English 6 95

Planning date:
Week: UNIT 4: MY NEIGHBOURHOOD
Period: Lesson 1: Getting started – Lost in the old town!

I. OBJECTIVES:
By the end of the lesson, students will be able to use the lexical items related to the topic My
neighbourhood and use the vocabularies and structures to talk about different places and show
directions to these.
II. LANGUAGE ANALYSIS
1. Knowledge:
* Vocabulary: places lexical items : neighbourhood (n), to be/get lost
2. Skills: listening, speaking and reading
3. Attitude: positive about your neighbourhood , love their neighbourhood
4. Competences: Ss can join teamwork, SS can have life skills ,Ss know how to learn
English right
II. MATERIALS
- Grade 6 textbook, Unit 4, Getting started
- Projector/ pictures and cards
sachmem.vn
IV. PROCEDURES : (STAGES)
1. Warm-up (5’)
* Aim: - to activate students’knowledge on the topic of the unit
-to set the context for the listen and read part
* Content: Listen an EL song and fill in the blanks
* Products: Students say words aloud (indepently)
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
* Warm up: T – SS ( Individual work) Warm up: Team work
- T - Ss * Chitchatting:
“Do you know where it is?”
Teacher shows some images of Hoi An on the “Have you ever been to Hoi An?”
screen and asks students some open questions “Do you remember anything special in Hoi
An?”

Teacher sets the context for the listening and

reading text: Write the title on the board My
neighbourhood.

Today we are going to travel around Hoi An;

before we start the lesson, let’s get some

GV: Phuong Mai –Lesson Plan English 6 96

vocabulary first.

2. Presentation (5’)
* Aim: Aim: to introduce new vocabulary
* Content: learn some vocabularies related to the topic.
* Products: Students read and understand the meaning of vocab.
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content

- T - Ss. * Vocabulary
* Pre teach vocabulary -. neighbourhood (n): /ˈneɪbəhʊd:vùng lân cận
- Teacher use different techniques to teach - to be/get lost: /tuˈbɪ/ /get lost/: bị lạc
vocab (pictures, situation, realia) - Cross the road : băng qua đường
- Follow the seven steps of teaching vacab. - Go / keep straight: đi thẳng
- Repeat in chorus and individually - Turn right / left: rẽ phải/ trái

- Copy all the words

* Checking vocab: < Rub out and remmember>

Practice: (20’)
Task 1 (5’)
* Aims: To have students know the topic .
* Content: Listen and read the conversation.
* Products: Students read and understand the meaning of the conversation.
Students know how to role play.
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
Task 1: T-Ss, Ss-Ss Task 1. Listen and read
- Set the context for the listening and reading.
- T has Ss look at the picture and answer some - What are Nick, Phong and Khang doing?
questions. - What might be happening to them?
-T can also ask Ss to share any recent
experiences of being lost . - Have you ever got lost?
Elicit answers, but do not confirm whether - Where and when? How did you feel then?
their answers are right or wrong. - What did you do?
- Ask Ss to talk a bit about the place where
Nick, Phong and Khang are standing.
-Teacher plays the recording twice. * Role play.
- Students listen and read.
- Teacher checks students’ prediction.
- Teacher calls 3 students to read the
conversation aloud.
Task 2 (7’)
* Aims: To practice the targeted language and the background knowledge of my neighbourhood.
* Content: Read the conversation again and put the actions in order.
* Products: Students write correct words on the board.
* Organization of implementtion:

Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content

GV: Phuong Mai –Lesson Plan English 6 97
Task 2: T-Ss, Ss-Ss Task 2: Read the conversation again and put
- Teacher tells students to read the conversation the actions in order.
again and work independently to find the
answers. Remind students to underline the Answer key:
information and correct the false statements. 1. b 2. c 3. d
- Teacher has students pair compare before 4. e 5. d
checking with the whole class.
- Teacher calls some students to give the
answers.

Task 3:(5’)
* Aims: To help students know how to use let’s and shall to make suggestions.
* Content: How to make suggestions.
* Products: Understand and know how to make suggestions.
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
Task 3: How to make suggestions.
Task 3:T-Ss, Ss-Ss
Teacher asks students to look at the photos and * Answer key:
the text in order to find the answers. 1. Let’s go to Chua Cau!
- Students work independently. 2. Shall we go there first?
- Teacher allows students to share their answers 3. First cross the road, and then turn left.
before discussing as a class. 4. Fine, let’s go.
5. Let’s ask her.
Model sentences: Making suggestions Model sentences: Making suggestions
Teacher asks: - Shall we go there first?
- Where do Phong, Nick and Khang go first? - Let’s go to Chua Cau
Who suggests going there? What does he say?  OK, sure.
Do Nick and Khang agree? What do they say? * We can use “Shall we +V1” and “Let’s + V1”
Teacher writes model sentences to make suggestion

Task 4 (7’)
* Aims: To help students know how to give directions through the conversation
* Content: Read the conversation, find and underline the following directions.
* Products: The correct answers from Ss. (individual work)
* Organization:

Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content

Task 4: Read the conversation, find and
- Have students quickly match each direction underline the following directions.
with the diagram. Check their answers as a + Answer keys:
class. - Cross the road, turn left, go straight, take the
If students do not understand the phrases, use second turning on the left, turn right.
the diagrams to work the meaning out from the
context. * Match these directions with the diagrams
- If it is a weaker class, ask for translation to below.
make sure they understand.
-With a stronger class, teacher may wish to ask
some additional questions,
e.g. Can you tell me the way to the post office
GV: Phuong Mai –Lesson Plan English 6 98
near here?, etc.

Answer key:
1. B, 2. A, 3. C, 4. E, 5. D

Production:(5’)
Task 5: (5’)
* Aims: To help Ss practise giving directions.
* Content: Game- Find places
* Products: Practise in groups in font of the class.
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
Task 5 :T-Ss, Ss-Ss Task 5: Game- Find places
- Demonstrate the game with a more able
student.
Ask students to play the game in pairs. In a
weaker class, work together with students first:
asking about one or two different places on the
map and eliciting the answers. Then when they
know exactly what to do, ask them to work in
pairs.
-Students work in groups of four to look around -
the class and write down things they can see in
EX:
the class.
A: Go straight. Take the first turning on the right.
-Students may ask teacher if they don’t know
It’s on your right.
the names of the items.
B: Is that the cinema?
-Students share with the whole class.
A: Yes, it is.
….
3. Consolidation (3’)
* Aim: To consolidate what students have learnt in the lesson..
* Content:. Summarise briefly the main content in the lesson.
* Products: Say aloud what they remember from the lesson.
* Organization:

Teacher’s and Ss’ activities Content

- Teacher asks students to talk about what they - some new words
have learnt in the lesson. - Read and understand content of the conversation
- Ss work indepently
4. Homework (2’)
* Aim: To revise the lesson and prepare for the next lesson.
* Content: Review the lesson and prepare for the next lesson ( A closer look 1)
* Products: Students’ textbook and workbook
* Organization
GV: Phuong Mai –Lesson Plan English 6 99
Teacher’s and Ss’ activities Content
- T reminds Ss to do homework and prepare the - Learn by heart all the new words.
new lesson. - Read the dialogue again.
- Prepare lesson 2 ( A closer look 1).

Planning date:
Week: UNIT 4: MY NEIGHBOURHOOD
Period: Lesson 2: A closer look 1

I. OBJECTIVES:
By the end of the lesson, students will be able to:
- Use the lexical items related to the topic My neighbourhood;
- Use the vocabulary and structures to talk about and describe places in a neighbourhood;
pronounce and recognize the sounds /i/ and /i:/.
II. LANGUAGE ANALYSIS
1. Knowledge:
* Vocab: lexical items related to the topic ‘My neighbourhood’
* Grammar: the sounds /i/ and /i:/.
2. Skills: Listening, writing and speaking
3. Attitude: To teach Ss to work hard, love their neighbourhood.
4. Competences: Talking and describing about a neighbourhood; - Co-operation, self- study,
using language to do exercises.
III. MATERIALS
* Preparation:
1. Teacher: Text books , pictures, planning , …
- Grade 6 textbook, Unit 4, A closer look 1
- Smart TV/Pictures, sets of word cards
- sachmem.vn
2. Students: Text books, notebooks, posters, ….
IV. PROCEDURES : (STAGES)
* Warm-up (5’)
* Aim: To activate students’ prior knowledge and vocabulary related to the topic, the targeted
vocabulary and its pronunciation.
* Content: Game: Network ( places)
* Products: Students write words on the board. (Team work)
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content

GV: Phuong Mai –Lesson Plan English 6 100

Game: Network
- Teacher divides the class into two teams, then school
writes the topic “places” on the board and
gives them two minutes to discuss.
- After that time, a student from each team one
by one runs to the board and writes one word.
- The team which has more correct answers is * Suggested answer:
the winner. - market, cinema, bank, supermarket, temple,
- T leads in the lesson : zoo, bookstore
“ Now we are going to some vocab about
places…”

2. Presentation (7’)
(Vocab- pre-teach)
* Aim: To teach students some places and adjectives describing ones in a neighbourhood.
* Content: Some vocab related to the lesson.
* Products: read and understand the meaning of vocab.
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
- T - Ss * Vocabulary
* Pre teach vocabulary - square (n) : quảng trường
- Teacher use different techniques to teach - cathedral (n): thánh đường
vocab (pictures, situation, …..) - railway station (n) : nha ga
- Repeat in chorus and individually - crowded (adj) : đông đúc
- Copy all the words - peaceful (adj) : yên bình
- modern (adj) : hiện đại
- boring (adj): buồn chán

* Checking vocab: < Matching>

2. Practice (10’)

Task 1: (5’)
* Aims: To help students name places in a neighbourhood.
* Content: Match the places with the pictures. Then listen, check and repeat the words.
* Products: The correct key from Ss .
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
Task 1: T-Ss Task 1: Match the places below with the pictures.
- Teacher asks students to match the places Then listen, check and repeat the words.
with the pictures. Answer key:
- Students do the task. 1. C
- Teacher asks students to swap their books 2. E
and mark in pairs. 3. D
- Teacher plays the recording (Track 24) for 4. A
students to listen and check their partner’s 5. B
answers.
- Teacher plays the recording again with a
pause after each item and asks them to
repeat the words/ phrases chorally and
individually.
GV: Phuong Mai –Lesson Plan English 6 101
Task2: (5’)
* Aims: To help students practice asking and answering about places in a neighbourhood.
* Content: Ask and answer questions about where you live.
* Products: Work in pairs to ask and answer questions in front of the class.
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
Task 2: T - Ss, Ss - Ss Task 2: Ask and answer questions about where you
- Ss works in pairs live.
- Teacher asks students to work in pairs to Example:
ask and answer questions about where they A: Is there a square in your neighbourhood?
live. Remind them that they can use the B: Yes, there is. / No, there isn’t
places in 1 or any places they want to ask.
- Teacher calls some pairs to practice in
front of the class.
- Teacher gives feedback and corrections
(if necessary).

Task 3: (5’)
* Aims: To revise the adjective students learnt in primary school and help them practice asking and
answering about places in a neighbourhood.
* Content: Ask and answer about your neighbourhood
* Products: Ask and answer questions in front of the class. ( group work)
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
Task 3:T-Ss, Ss-Ss Task 3: Ask and answer about your neighbourhood
- Ss work in groups. You can use the adjectives below.
- Teacher models this activity with a more
able student and remind students that they Example :
can use adjectives in the box or other A: Is your neighbourhood quiet?
adjectives they know to talk about their B: Yes, it is. / No, it isn’t
village, town, city.
- Students work with their partners.
- Teacher calls some pairs to practice in
front of class
- Teacher may ask other students to give
comments.

* PRONUNCIATION
(Pre-teach the sounds /i/ and /i:/)
* Aims: To help students to identify how to pronounce the sounds /i/ and /i:/.
* Content: PRONUNCIATION * Sounds /i/ and /i:/
* Products: Read and know how to pronounce the Sounds /i/ and /i:/
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content

GV: Phuong Mai –Lesson Plan English 6 102

Task 4:T-Ss, Ss-Ss PRONUNCIATION
- Teacher introduces 2 sounds /i/ and /i:/ to
students and lets them watch a video about * Sounds /i/ and /i:/
how to pronounce these two sounds and
asks them to identify which sound is longer + Example:
and which one is shorter. - /i/: chip, tin, ship, …
- Teacher asks students to give some words - /i:/: cheap, teen, sheep, …
they know containing these sounds.

* Practice

Task 4:(5’)
* Aims: To help students identify and practice the /i/ and /i:/ sounds.
* Content: Listen and repeat the words. Pay attention to the sounds /i/ and /i:/.
* Products: Whole class practice the sound /i/ and /i:/.
* Organization:
Giaoandethitienganh.info
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
Task 4 :T-Ss, Task 4: Listen and repeat the words. Pay
- Teacher asks students to practice the sound attention to the sounds /i/ and /i:/.
/i/ and /i/ together. * Answer key:
Giaoandethitienganh.info
- Teacher plays the recording and ask /i/
students to repeat noisy, exciting, expensive, friendly
- Teacher gets students to work in pairs and
put the words in the correct column while
they listen and call some pairs to write their /i:/
answers on the board before checking their clean, peaceful, convenient, cheap
answers with the whole class
Task 5: (5’)
* Aims: To help students practice the sounds /i/ and /i:/ in sentences.
* Content: Listen and practice the chant. Notice the sounds /i/ and /i:/.
* Products: Whole class practise the chant .
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’ activities Content
- Teacher asks students to listen while Task 5: Listen and practice the chant. Notice the
teacher plays the recording. sounds /i/ and /i:/.
- Teacher plays the recording again and ask
students to chant along.
- Teacher provides further practice by
dividing the class into 2 groups.
- Teacher has groups sing alternate lines.
3. Production (5’)
* Aim: To give students chance to apply and make challenging what they have learnt with more
difficult task.
* Content: * Game:Tongue Twister
* Products: Students plays on groups.
* Organization:

- Teacher shows the Tongue Twister and * Game:Tongue Twister

asks students to practice in groups of 4. 1. He took a chilly dip six feet deep in the sea.
- Students practice in groups. He says it keeps him fit.
GV: Phuong Mai –Lesson Plan English 6 103
- Teacher calls the representative from each 2. He thinks he's slick in his sleek wheels meeting
group to say the sentences in front of the and greeting the elite.
class.
- Teacher asks each group to vote for the
group which has the best pronunciation.

4. Consolidation (3’)
* Aim: To consolidate what students have learnt in the lesson.
* Content: Vocab and how to pronounce the sounds /i/ and /i:/.
* Products: Say aloud some words they remember from the lesson.
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’ activities Content
- Teacher asks students to talk about what - Vocabulary and how to pronounce the sound /i/
they have learnt in the lesson and /i:/.

5. Homework (2’)
* Aim: To revise the lesson and prepare for the next lesson.
* Content: Review the lesson and prepare for the next lesson and do exersie in the workbbook
* Products: Students’ textbook and workbook
* Organization:

Teacher’s and Ss’ activities Content

- T reminds Ss to do homework and prepare - Learn by heart all the new words.
the new lesson. - Prepare lesson 3 ( A closer look 2)..

Planning date:
Week: UNIT 4: MY NEIGHBOURHOOD
Period: Lesson 3: A closer look 2

I. OBJECTIVES:
By the end of the lesson, students can understand and use comparative adjectives to make
sentences, dialogues.
II. LANGUAGE ANALYSIS
1. Knowledge:
* Vocab: lexical items related to the topic ‘My neighbourhood’
* Grammar: : Comparative adjectives.
2. Skills: Listening, writing and speaking
3. Attitude: To teach Ss to work hard, love their neighbourhood.
4. Competences: - Co-operation, self- study, using comparative adjectives to make sentences,
dialogues.
III. MATERIALS
* Preparation:
1. Teacher: Text books , pictures, planning , …
- Grade 6 textbook, Unit 4, A closer look 2
- Smart TV/Pictures, sets of word cards
- sachmem.vn
2. Students: Text books, notebooks, posters, ….
IV. PROCEDURES : (STAGES)
GV: Phuong Mai –Lesson Plan English 6 104
* Warm-up (5’)
* Aim: To activate students’ prior knowledge and vocabulary related to the targeted grammar
of comparison.
* Content: * Game: Crossword
* Products: Ss play game in groups and find correct words.
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
* Warm up (group work) * Game: Crossword
- T - Ss CLEVER
- Teacher divides the class into 2 groups. BUS–STOP
- Teacher prepares the ppt for the crosswords, TEMPLE
students take turn to answer the words PEACEFUL
- The one can get the key word wins the game. CATHEDRAL
- Teacher asks students how the understand the SQUARE
key word COMPARISON NOISY
Lead in EXPENSIVE
- Teacher says: “This lesson today we are going B ORING
to use comparative adjectives” MODERN
1. Presentation (7’)
* Aim: To introduce targeted grammar of comparison.
* Content: Comparative adjectives
* Products: understand and how to use comparative adjectives
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
* Pre – grammar. * Grammar : Comparative adjectives
- T - Ss
Who’s taller ? Tom or Mary.
- Teacher draws students’ attention to the
form of the sentences from chatting and Tom is taller than Mary
ask them whether they know the target
tense.
- Teacher provides or confirms the answers
and lead in the grammar focus of the lesson:

- A house in a city is more expensive than a

- T explains the usage and the form. house in the countryside.
- Ss listen and copy down.  Form:
- Short Adj:
S + be + adj-ER + than + S’.
- Long Adj:
S + be + MORE + adj + than + S’.
 Use:
+ We can use comparative adjectives to compare
two people or things.
+ Sign: “than”
2. Practice (20’)
Task 1 + Task 2 (8’)
* Aims: To help students practise using comparative adjectives.
To help students practise forming the correct comparative form of adjectives.
* Content: Complete the sentences with comparative form of the adjectives.
GV: Phuong Mai –Lesson Plan English 6 105
* Products: Students write correct the answers on the board.
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
Task 1:T –Ss : Task 1: Complete the sentences with
Complete the sentences with comparative comparative form of the adjectives.
form of the adjectives. * Answer key:
- Ask students to do the exercise individually 1. taller
and then compare their answers with a 2. noisier
classmate. Check the answers as a class. 3. bigger
Confirm the correct answers. 4. more peaceful
( Or Teacher can have students work by 5. more exciting
playing game : Lucky number.) Task 2:
Task 2: Ss-Ss Complete the letter using the correct form of
Complete the letter using the correct form the words.
of the words. Answer key:
- Ask students to read and complete the letter 1. hotter
individually. Remind them to pay attention 2. smaller
to the number of the syllables in each 3. older
adjective. 4. wider
Have students compare their answers in pairs 5. more delicious
before checking with the whole class. cheaper
Confirm the correct answers
Production (8’)
Task 3: (5’)
* Aims: To help Ss practise using comparative adjectives.
* Content: Compare two neighbourhoods using the given adjectives
* Products: Students’ correct sentences on the board.
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
Task 2: T - Ss, Ss - Ss Task 3: Compare two neighbourhoods using
- Ask Ss to look at the pictures of the two the given adjectives.
neighbourhoods. --> Suggested answer:
- Elicit the contrast between the things in the 1. Binh Minh is more crowded than Long Son.
two neighbourhoods and ask them to use the 2. Long Son is more boring than Binh Minh.
adjectives in the box to describe the m. 3. Long Son is quieter than Binh Minh.
- Ask Ss to write sente nces, comparing the 4. Long Son is more peaceful than Binh Minh.
two neighbourhoods. 5. Binh Minh is more modern than Long Son.
Have Ss compare their sentences in pairs …….
before showi ng some of their sente nces to
the whole class.
- Ask other Ss to give comments and correct
any mistakes if possible.
Task 4: (3’)
* Aims: To give Ss further practice on using comparative adjectives.
* Content: Compare life in the city with life in the country.
* Products: Ss work in groups to ask and answer in front of the class.
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
* T-Ss, Ss-Ss Task 4: Work in groups and compare life in
- Teacher use the Power Point screen to the city with life in the country.
show the two pictures and asks students to
GV: Phuong Mai –Lesson Plan English 6 106
work in groups to talk about the differences.
- Encourage the students to use the adjectives
in the textbook first and then they can
broaden by adding more adjectives to
describe. Example:
A: Is the life in the city noisier than the life in the
countryside?
B: Yes, it is.
A: Is the life in the countryside more modern than
the life in the city?
B: No, it isn't.
5. Consolidation (3’)
* Aim: To consolidate what students have learnt in the lesson.
* Content: summarize the main content in the lesson.
* Products: Ss say what students have learnt in the lesson.
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’ activities Content
Teacher asks students to talk about what they - Grammar: Comparative adjectives
have learnt in the lesson. - form and usage.

4. Homework (2’)
* Aim: To revise the knowledge that students have gained in this lesson and prepare the new
lesson
* Content: Review the lesson and prepare for the next lesson and do exersie in the workbbook
* Products: Students’ textbook and workbook
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’ activities Content
- T reminds Ss to do homework and prepare - Do exercises in the workbook.
the new lesson. - Prepare lesson 4 ( communication)

Planning date:
Week: UNIT 4: MY NEIGHBOURHOOD
Period: Lesson 4 : Communication

I. OBJECTIVES:
By the end of the lesson, students will be able to:
- ask for and giving directions in a neighbourhood;
- listen for sequence and for details;
- create an audio guide for Ho Chi Minh City.
II. LANGUAGE ANALYSIS
1. Knowledge:
* Vocab: lexical items related to city fact file of some cities.
* Grammar: Comparative, giving instructions.
2. Skills: Listening, writing and speaking
3. Attitude: To teach Ss to work hard, love their neighbourhood.
4. Competences : develop their language skills, as well as communication, summarizing ; -
Giving directions
abilities,…
III. MATERIALS
* Preparation:
1. Teacher: Text books , pictures, planning , …
GV: Phuong Mai –Lesson Plan English 6 107
- Grade 6 textbook, Unit 4, communication
- Smart TV/Pictures, sets of word cards
- sachmem.vn
2. Students: Text books, notebooks, posters, ….
IV. PROCEDURES : (STAGES)
1.Warm-up (5’)
* Aim: To introduce the topic; To lead in the lesson about vocabulary and pronunciation
* Content:
* Products:
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
* Warm up * Game: Guessing game
- T - Ss
- Teacher divides the class into 2 groups and let
them play a small game: Guessing game => Hoi An, HCM city.
- Teacher gives 3 pictures related to Hoi An (one
by one) and asks “Which city is this?”, students
guess the name of the place and explain their
guess. - Have you ever been to Hoi An?
- What do you know about this place?
- Lead in: * Suggested answers:
- Teacher leads students into the lesson by Yes, I have.
asking students some questions: I think Hoi An is an ancient town, it has Ong
 Today we are going to listen to a guide to Hoi pagoda, Hoa Nhap workshop,…
An.

2. Presentation ( 5’)
* EVERYDAY ENGLISH
Asking for and giving diredions

Task 1: (5’)
* Aim: To introduce ways to ask for and give directions in English.
* Content: Listening and expressing the strutures of giving directions
* Products: Role play and practice in front of the class.
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
Task 1:T –Ss Task 1: Listening and expressing the strutures
of giving directions.
- Teacher plays the recording for students to
listen and read the dialogue between A and B
at the same time. 1. Could you tell me the way to …?
- Ask students to pay attention to the 2. Where’s the nearest …?
sentences and phrases used to ask for and
give directions. 1. go along
-Teacher elicits the structures for directions 2. on your left/ right
- Teachers elicit the phrases to give directions 3. take the first turning
from student.
Audio script:
A: Excuse me. Could you tell me the way to the
cinema, please?
B: Go along this street. It’s on your left.

GV: Phuong Mai –Lesson Plan English 6 108

A: Excuse me. Where’s the nearest post office,
please?
B: Go out of the station. Take the first turning on
the right.

3. Practice (20’)

Task 2: (5’)
* Aims: To practice asking for and giving directions.
* Content: practice the phrases and structures of asking for and giving directions.
* Products: Some pairs to practise in front of the class.
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
Task 2:T –Ss : Ss- Ss Task 2: Work in pairs. Have students practice the
- Teacher asks students to work in pairs phrases and structures of asking for and giving
and take turns to practice the dialogue. directions. (p. 61)
- Students do the task in pairs.
- Teacher calls some pairs to practise in
front of the class.
- Teacher gives feedback and
corrections (if necessary).

Task 3: (5’)
* Aims: To apply the knowledge about asking and giving directions in a neighbourhood
* Content: Make similar conversations to ask for and give directions to places near your school.
* Products: Some pairs to practice in front of the class.
* Organization:

Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content

Task 3: T - Ss, Ss – Ss Task 3: Work in pairs. Make similar
. conversations to ask for and give directions to
- Teacher asks students to work in pairs places near your school.
to make similar conversations, using Example:
the structures and phrases for asking A: Excuse me. Could you tell me the way to Song Ve
for and giving directions. market please?
- Encourage them to practice asking for (B: Go straight and then take the second turning on
and giving directions to some places the right.
near their school.
- Move around to observe and provide
help.
- Call some pairs to practice in front of
the class.
- Comment on their performance.
4. Production (8’)
* An audio guide to a place
Task 4:(5’)
* Aims: To help students get used to some famous landmarks in big cities.
* Content: listening to an audio guide to Hoi An. Listen and fill in the blanks
* Product: Write the correct name under the pictures of the pictures.(individual work)

GV: Phuong Mai –Lesson Plan English 6 109

* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
Task 4: T - Ss, Ss – Ss Task 4: Nick is listening to an audio guide to Hoi
- Teacher shows 4 pictures of 4 places An. Listen and fill in the blanks. (p. 43)
mentioned in the recording. Students
give the order of their names
(individually).
a) Café 96
- The whole class share their ideas.
- Teacher writes some students’ ideas
on the board to check later.
-Teacher asks students to work in pairs,
read the names in the boxes (make sure
that they pronounce the names
correctly) and write the correct name b) Hoa Nhap Workshop
under the pictures of the pictures.
-Students share the answer with the
whole class.
- Teacher checks and elicits from
students any information they know
about the pictures. c) Museum of Sa Huynh
Culture

d) Quan Cong Temple

- Ss run through the passage of Ex3 /
P43
- T play Track 37, students fill in the
gaps (individually).
- Students compare with a partner, then * Fill in the gaps
check together. Answer key:
1. straight
2. second
3. next to
4. near
Task(5’)
* Aims: To help students practice creating an audio guide for Ho Chi Minh City.
* Content: Look at the map below and create an audio guide for District 1 of Ho Chi Minh City.
* Products: Ss give directions to places on the map (group work)
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
Task 5: T - Ss, Ss - Ss Task 5: Look at the map below and create an audio
- Ask students to read the instructions guide for District 1 of Ho Chi Minh City. (p. 43)
carefully
- Remind them of the expressions they
can use to give directions.
- Ss work in groups
- Group 1: Thong Nhat Palace
- Group 2: Sai Gon Notre Dame
GV: Phuong Mai –Lesson Plan English 6 110
Cathedral
- Group 3: Ho Chi Minh city Museum
- Group 4: Ton Duc Thang mMuseum

Use “first, after that, and finally” to link the direction

Example:
Let’s start our tour in Ho Chi Min City. We are in Hai
Ba Trung now.
First, go to…………

5. Consolidation (3’)
* Aims: To consolidate what students have learnt in the lesson.
* Content: Summarize the content of the lesson
* Products: Say aloud what they have learnt in front of the class.
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
Teacher asks students to talk about - Asking for and giving diredions
what they have learnt in the lesson. - Listen to an audio guide to a place and create an
audio guide for District 1 of Ho Chi Minh City
6. Homework (2’)
* Aim: To revise the knowledge that students have gained in this lesson. And prepare for the
next lesson: Skills 1.
* Content: Review the lesson and prepare for the next lesson and do exersie in the workbbook
* Products: Students’ textbook and workbook
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’ activities Content
- T reminds Ss to do homework and - Learn by heart the structures about asking and giving
prepare the new lesson. directions
-Do exercise C, D / P29,30,31,32-WB
Giaoandethitienganh.info
- To prepare for the next lesson: Unit 4 My
neighbourhood / Skills 1.

Planning date:
Week: UNIT 4: MY NEIGHBOURHOOD
Period: Lesson 5 : Skills 1

I. OBJECTIVES:
By the end of the lesson, students will be able to:
- develop reading skill for general and specific information;
- identify different features of a place; use what they have learnt to talk about a city.
II. LANGUAGE ANALYSIS
1. Knowledge:
* Vocab: lexical items related to city fact file of some cities
* Grammar: Making suggestions.

GV: Phuong Mai –Lesson Plan English 6 111

2. Skills: Reading and speaking
3. Attitude: To teach Ss to work hard, love their neighbourhood.
4. Competences: Co-operation, self- study, friend.develop their language skills; Asking for and
giving directions neighbourhood.
III. MATERIALS
* Preparation:
1. Teacher: Text books , pictures, planning , …
- Grade 6 textbook, Unit 4, skills 1
- Smart TV/Pictures, sets of word cards
- sachmem.vn
2. Students: Text books, notebooks, posters, ….
IV. PROCEDURES : (STAGES)
1. Warm-up (5’)
* Aim: To activate students’ prior knowledge and vocabulary related to the topic of reading and
To lead in the lesson about Skills 1.
* Content: Play a game : Mattching
* Products: Match correctly and fast ( team work)
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
- T- Ss * Play a game : Mattching
- Teacher divides the class into 2 teams.
- Teacher shows the screen, includes words
in EL and words in Vietnamese.
- Members from two teams take turns and
matchs as fast as possible.
- The team matched faster and correctly is
the winner.

2. Presentation (7’)
* Aim:. To provide students with some lexical items before reading the text.
* Content: Learn some vocab related the topic.
* Products: Read and understand the meaning of words.
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
T –Ss : * VOCABULARY
- suburb (n), /ˈsʌbɜːb/: khu ngoại ô (note: usually
plural) (Synonym: the countryside) in the suburb
- Pre teach vocabulary of…..
- Teacher use different techniques to teach - outdoor activity, /ˈaʊtˌdɔːr/ /ækˈtɪvəti/: hoạt động
vocab (pictures, situation, explaination…..) ngoài trời (example: play football, go camping, go
- Repeat in chorus and individually fishing… where can do these activities?)
- Copy all the words - backyard (n), /ˌbækˈjɑːrd/: sân sau (explaination:
the yard behind the house)
- dislike (v), /dɪˈslaɪk/: không thích (antonym: like,
love…)
- incredibly (adv), /ɪnˈkredəbəl/: cực kỳ, một cách
* Checking vocab: đáng kinh ngạc (synonym: very, extremely)
- crowded (a), /ˈkraʊdɪd/ explanation
GV: Phuong Mai –Lesson Plan English 6 112
*Checking: what and where
3. Pre -reading (5’)
* Aims: To lead in the lesson about Skills 1.
* Content: Some questions about Khang’s neighbourhood
* Products: answer the questions correctly. ( individual work)
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
Task 2:T –Ss 1. Where do you think Khang’s neighbourhood is?
- Teacher leads students into the lesson by 2. What do you think about it?
asking students some questions: 3. What are there in the neighbourhood?
- Ss look at the pictures of Khang's 4. Do you like living there? Why?/ Why not?
neighbourhood and answer the questions  You’re going to read Khang’s blog.
- T gives feedback Suggested answers:
3. In the countryside.
4. I think Khang’s neighbourhood is very nice and
peaceful.
5. There are a lot of trees, markets,...
Yes, I do. Because it is very peaceful.
4. While-Reading (10’)
Task 1 + Task 2
* Aims: To develop reading skill for general and specific information.
* Content: Read Khang’s blog. find the meaning of words in the
* Products: Students’ explaination about the meaning of words clearly.
* Organization :
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
- Teacher asks students to read the blog Task 1: Read Khang’s blog. Look at the words in
and underline the words in the box the box, then find them in the text and underline
individually. them. What do they mean?
- Then let them try to guess the meaning. Task 2: Read Khang’s blog again and fill the table
with the information.
- Students read the text and answer the Like Dislike
questions. - It’s great for outdoor - The streets are
- Students can compare their answers activities. busy, crowded, and
before discussing them as classwork. - There’s almost noisy during the day.
everything here.
- Most houses have a
backyard and a front yard.
- People are incredibly
friendly.
- The food is very good.
Task 3:
* Aims: To help Ss develop their reading skill for specific information (scanning).
* Content: Read Khang’s blog again. Then answer the questions.
* Products: Students say the answers correctly.
* Organization :
Task 3: T - Ss, Ss – Ss Task 3: Read Khang’s blog again. Then answer
- Teacher asks students to go through the the questions.
questions (1 – 4) to make sure that they * Answer key:
understand them and know what 1. It is in the suburb of Da Nang.
information is being asked. 2. Because it has beautiful parks, sandy beaches and
- Ss has students answer the questions by fine weather.
GV: Phuong Mai –Lesson Plan English 6 113
playing game : Lucky number 3. They are very friendly.
4. Because they are busy and crowded.
5+6 : LN
5. Pre-Speaking
Task 4:
* Aims: To help students form the ideas for their speaking
* Content: Make notes about your neighbourhood. Think about what you like/ dislike about it.
* Products: Make notes of the information and share with the class.
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
- Teacher asks students to work in groups Task 4: Make notes about your neighbourhood.
and allows each group to think what they Think about what you like/ dislike about it.
like/ dislike in their neighbourhood. Example:
- Teacher asks students to discuss and LIKES DISLIKES
make notes of the information they want to -delicious and cheap - crowed streets
share with the class. food - polluted environment.
- Teacher goes around and offers help if - nice and friendly
needed. people
- fresh air
6. While-Speaking
* Aims: To help student use what they have learnt so far to talk about their neighbourhood
* Content: Work in pairs. Ask and answer about what you like and dislike about your
neighbourhood.
* Products: Role play in front of the class.
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
-Teacher invites some students to share Task 5: Work in pairs. Ask and answer about
their preparation and makes sure they what you like and dislike about your
speak in full sentences. neighbourhood.
- Students share their ideas with the whole Example:
class. A: Where do you live?
B: I live in the centre of Quang Ngai city.
A: What do you like about it?
B: The weather is fine. The people are friendly and
the food is good.
A: What do you dislike about it?
(B: The streets are busy and crowded.
7. Consolidation (2’)
* Aims: To consolidate what students have learnt in the lesson.
* Content: Ss summarise what they have learnt with the two skills.
* Products: Students say what they have learnt with the two skills in front of the class.
* Organization:

Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content

- Teacher asks students to talk about what - 2 skills ( talk about their neighbourhood)
they have learnt in the lesson.
8. Homework (2’)
* Aim: To revise the knowledge that students have gained in this lesson.
* Content: Review the lesson and prepare for the next lesson .
* Products: Students’ textbook and workbook
* Organization:
GV: Phuong Mai –Lesson Plan English 6 114
- Teacher asks students to prepare the new - Do Ex inWB
lesson - Prepare: Skills 2 (Write a paraggraph about
your neighbourhood saying what you like or dislike

Planning date:
Week: UNIT 4: MY NEIGHBOURHOOD
Period: Lesson 6: Skills 2

I. OBJECTIVES:
By the end of the lesson, students will be able to listen for specific information about one’s
neighbourhood and write a paragraph about one’s neighbourhood.
II. LANGUAGE ANALYSIS
1. Knowledge:
* Vocab: lexical items related to city fact file of some cities
* Grammar: Simple present tense, giving instructions
2. Skills: Writing and listening
3. Attitude: To teach Ss to work hard, love their neighbourhood.
4. Competences: Co-operation, self- study; Students will developed listening and writing skills.
III. MATERIALS
GV: Phuong Mai –Lesson Plan English 6 115
* Preparation:
1. Teacher: Text books , pictures, planning , …
- Grade 6 textbook, Unit 4, Skills 2
- Smart TV/Pictures.
- sachmem.vn
2. Students: Text books, notebooks, posters, ….
IV. PROCEDURES : (STAGES)
1.Warm –up (5’)
* Aim: To introduce about the destination in the listening
* Content: Watch a Short video: Introduce busy life in Ho Chi Minh City
* Products: Answer the questions correctly.
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
* Warm up (Individual work) * Short video: Introduce busy life in Ho
Chi Minh City
- Before starting this lesson, ask students
about the content of the previous lesson.
Teacher may ask students to describe
Khang’s neighbourhood again.
- Teacher shows a picture and asks students
where it is.
 Lead in *Suggested answers:
- Teacher draws students’ attention to the Ho Chi Minh City
conservation.
- Today we are going to meet Khang again. - “Do you remember Khang?
He is talking with his friend Vy. Let’s see - “Where does he live?” (Da Nang).
what they are talking about.”
1. Pre-Listening (5’)
Task 1: (5’)
* Aim: To help students brainstorm about destination in the talk.
* Content: Read some statements True or False Prediction.
* Products: Ss say True or False aloud ( workindividually)
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
- Teacher asks students to go through the Task 1: True or False Prediction.
statements (1 – 5) to make sure that they 1. Vy lives in the center of Ho Chi Minh City.
understand them and know what 2. There is a big market near her house.
information they have to catch for the 3. The streets are narrow.
answers. 4. The schools are
- Students underline the key word(s) in far-away.
each statement and guess whether they are 5. There are some factories near her
True or False individually. neighbourhood.
3. While -listening ( 10’)
Task 2 (5’)
* Aims: To help students develop listening skill for specific information (T / F).
* Content: Listen and check.
* Products: Some students to read aloud their answers and correct the false sentences correctly
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
Task 2: T - Ss, Ss - Ss Task 2: Listen and check.
- Teacher plays the recording once or Answer key:
GV: Phuong Mai –Lesson Plan English 6 116
twice. 1. F (Vy lives in the suburbs of HCMC.)
- Teacher asks students to listen and tick 2. T
the answers. 3. F (The streets are wide.)
- Teacher asks students to compare their 4. T
answers with the prediction made 5. T
previously.
- Teacher calls on some students to read
aloud their answers and correct the false
one(s).
- Teacher checks students’ answers as a
class. - What does Vy like and dislike about HCMC
Lead-in
I know that you can remember main
content of the listening after doing Task 2.
With the third listening, let’s get some
detail words for me…
Post-Listening
Task 3: (5’)
* Aims: To help students develop their skill of listening for specific information
* Content: Listen again and fill in the blanks.
* Products: the correct answers on the board. ( pair work)
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
- T-Ss, Ss-Ss( work group) Task 3: Listen again and fill in the blanks.
- Ask students to study the phrases with the * Answer key:
blanks carefully. Students may work in 1. art gallery
pairs to discuss the answers from the 2. wide
information they have listened. 3. friendly
- Play the recording again and have 4. far
students write the answers as they listen. 5. crowded
Students can share their answers with
their partners.
- With a weaker class, teacher may play the
recording many times until students have
written down all their answers. Call some * Audio script:
students to write their answers on the Khang: Where do you live, Vy?
board. Vy: I live in the suburbs of Ho Chi Minh City.
- Play the recording again for students to Khang: What do you like about it?
check the answers. Teacher may pause at Vy: There are many things I like about it. There's
the sentences that include the information a big market near my house. There are also
students need for their answers. many shops, restaurants and art galleries here.
- If there is time, invite one or two students The streets are wide. The people here are helpful
to briefly describe Vy’s neighbourhood, and friendly
focusing on what she likes and dislikes Khang: What do you dislike about it?
about it. Vy: The schools are too faraway. There are also
some factories near here, so the air isn't very
clean and the streets are noisy and crowded.
4. Pre -writing (5’)
* Aims: To provide Ss some ideas for the next writing activity.
* Content: Tick (✓) what you like or dislike about a neighbourhood.
* Products: share the answers with their partners.
GV: Phuong Mai –Lesson Plan English 6 117
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
- Ask Ss to tick what they like and don't
like about their neighbourhood, and then 3. Tick (✓) what you like or dislike about a
ask them to share their answers with their neighbourhood.
partners.
- Ss count how many things they have in Likes Dislikes
common with their partners. 1. sandy beaches X
2. heavy traffic X
3 X
. many modern buildings and
offices
4. peaceful streets X
5. good restaurants and café X
6. sunny weather X
7. helpful and friendly X
people
8. many shops and markets

5. While-Writing (5’)
* Aims: To help Ss practise writi ng a paragraph about their neighbourhood.
* Content: Write a paragraph of about your neighbourhood saying what you like and dislike
about it.
* Products: Write the first draft individually
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
- T-Ss, Ss-Ss * Task 4: Write a paragraph of about your
-Teacher reminds students that the first neighbourhood saying what you like and
important thing is always to think about dislike about it. Use Khang's blog as a model.
what they are going to write. Students can
use the ideas they have ticked in 3. - * Make notes about your neighbourhood.
GV: Phuong Mai –Lesson Plan English 6 118
Teacher asks students to brainstorm for the Think about the things you like/ dislike about it.
ideas and the language necessary for
writing. - It’s great for outdoor - The weather is too
- Ask Ss to write the first draft individually. activities. wet in rainy season.
- Next ask Ss to work in pairs doing peer - People are kind and - The streets are slope
corrections.Then have them write their friendly. down and old.
final version. -The food is delicious …..
-T may display all or some of the -----
Ss'writings on the wall/ notice board.
Tand other Ss give comments.
-Ss edit and revise their writing as
homework. If time is limited,T may ask
Ss to write the final version at home.

6. Post-Writing (5’)
* Aim: To peer check, cross check and final check students’ writing.
* Content: Students’ writing and cross check
* Products: gives feedback as a class discussion. (individual work)
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
- T-Ss, Ss-Ss Task 5: Students’ writing and cross check.
- Teacher asks students to exchange their * Model writing.
textbooks to check their friends’ writing. My neighbourhood is peaceful and the weather
- Teacher then gives feedback as a class is sunny and fine.
discussion. People are friendly and kind. The food is fresh
and delicous
Every house has a backyard and a frontyard.
However , there is one thong I dislike about it.
The roads are narrow .But I still love my
neighbourhood very much .

* Consolidation (2’)
* Aim: To consolidate what students have learnt in the lesson.
* Content: summarize the content of the lesson.
* Products: A student says what she/ he has learnt in the lesson.
* Organization:

Teacher’s and Ss’ activities Content

- Teacher asks students to talk about what - Listen a passage about Vy’s neighbourhood.
they have learnt in the lesson. - Write a paragraph of about your neighbourhood
saying what you like and dislike about it

* Homework (2’)
* Aim: To revise the knowledge that students have gained in this lesson.
* Content: Review the lesson and prepare for the next lesson and do exersie in the workbbook
* Products: Students’ textbook and workbook
* Organization

- Teacher asks students to rewrite their - Rewrite the writing in the notebook.
writing in their books. - Prepare “ Looking back and project”
- Teacher asks students to prepare the new
GV: Phuong Mai –Lesson Plan English 6 119
lesson.

Planning date:
Week: UNIT 4: MY NEIGHBOURHOOD
Period: Lesson 7: Looking back and project

I. OBJECTIVES:
By the end of the lesson, students will be able to review the vocabulary and grammar of Unit 4 and
apply what they have learnt (vocabularies and grammar) into practice through a project.
II. LANGUAGE ANALYSIS
1. Knowledge:
* Vocab: lexical items related to city fact file of some cities
* Grammar: Making suggestions, giving instructions, comparative
2. Skills: Speaking and writing
3. Attitude: To teach Ss to work hard, love their neighbourhood.
4. Competences: Comparing things and people.and Students will be developed some skills.
III. MATERIALS
* Preparation:
1. Teacher: Text books , pictures, planning , …
- Grade 6 textbook, Unit4 , Looking back and project
- Smart TV/Pictures.
- sachmem.vn
2. Students: Text books, notebooks, posters, ….
IV. PROCEDURES : (STAGES)
* Check- up (5’)
* Aim: To revise the vocabularies and structure about comparative related to the topic.
* Content: Check –up the old lesson “Write 7 adjectivesyou have just learned
- Make a sentence with a comparative adjective”
* Products: complete the task on the board correctly.
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
* Warm up (Team work) * Check –up:
- T –Ss. ? - Write 7 adjectivesyou have just learned
- T calls some SS go to the board to check - Make a sentence with a comparative
the old knowledge. adjective
- Ss go to the board to complete the task.
_ T feedbacks and gives marks.
+ Lead in : This is the last lesson of Unit 4,
I want you to revise the topic My
neighbourhood by doing some more
exercises.
* VOCABULARY
1. Task 1 (5’)
* Aim: To help students revise the vocabulary about places in the neighbourhood..
* Content: Write the name for each picture.
* Products: Students say the correct key aloud ( individual work, group work,…).
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
- T –Ss : Task 1: Write the name for each picture.
- Teacher encourages students to complete * Answer key:

GV: Phuong Mai –Lesson Plan English 6 120

the task individually. 1. temple
- Students exchange their textbooks to 2. railway station
compare their answers together. 3. square
- Teacher gives feedback to the whole 4. art gallery
class. 5. cathedral
* GRAMMAR (15’)
2. Task 2+ Task 3 (8’)

* Aims: To help students to make sentences using the comparative form.

* Content: Put the following adjectives in the correct column.
* Products: Complete the sentences on the board correctly.
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
- T –Ss ; Ss – Ss Task 2: Put the following adjectives in the
- Teacher encourages students to complete correct column.
the task individually. * Answer key:
- Students exchange their textbooks to 1. syllable: fast/ hot/ large/ quiet
discuss the reasons why they are choosing 2. syllables: heavy/ noisy
the appropriate words/ phrases. 3. syllables: expensive/ beautiful/ exciting
- Teacher gives feedback as a class Task 3: Write their comparative form in the
discussion. table below.
Task 3: T - Ss, Ss – Ss * Answer key:
- Teacher encourages students to complete faster
the task individually. more beautiful
- Student exchange their textbooks to discuss noisier
the reasons why they are choosing the more expensive
appropriate words/phrases. hotter
- Teacher gives feedback as a class more exciting
discussion. quieter
heavier
Task 4: T - Ss, Ss – Ss larger
T asks Ss Complete the sentences by playing Task 4: ( 7’) Complete the sentences
game : Lucky number. comparing the pictures.
- Class is divided into 2 groups. * Answer key: Game : Lucky number
- Teacher prepares 6 numbers which includes
4 questions about Complete the sentences 1. noisier
comparing the pictures.and 2 lucky 2. more modern
numbers. 3. more expensive
- Each team takes turns and chooses a 4.more peaceful
number and answers the question behind
the number. If the team answers the
question correctly, they will get 1 point.
- If the team chooses the lucky number, they
get 1 point without answering the question
and may choose another number.
3 . Production(3’):
* Aims: To give Ss further practice on using comparative adjectives.
* Content: Rewrite the sentences using the words in brackets.
* Products: Complete the sentences on the board correctly.
* Organization:

GV: Phuong Mai –Lesson Plan English 6 121

- T asks students work indepently. * Rewrite the sentences using the words in
.- SS sewrite the sentences using the words in brackets.
brackets. 1. Quang is lazier than Ha. (HARD-
- Ss complete the sentences in the book. WORKING)
- Teacher invites some students to complete 2. A city is noisier than a village.
on the board . (PEACEFUL)
- T comments and give marks. 3. There’s a post office on one side of my
house and a café on the other. (BETWEEN)
4. Please tell me something about your
neighbourhood. (CAN)
5. Oranges are cheaper than apples.
(EXPENSIVE)
4. Project (5’) *
* Aims: To allow students to apply what they have learnt (vocabulary and grammar) into
practice through a project.
* Content: * PROJECT: MY MAP
* Products: Students’ project on the posters.
* Organization:

Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content

- Have each student draw a map of their * PROJECT: MY MAP
neighbourhood with the names of at least - ACTIVITY 1
ten places on their map. Draw a map of a neighbourhood. Write
- Teacher may have students prepare their names of at least five places on your map.
maps at home.
- Ask students to work in pairs, taking turns ACTIVITY 2
to ask for and give directions to the places on Work in pairs. Take turns to ask for and
their maps. Go around and offer help if give directions to the places on the map.
necessary. If there is time, have some pairs
practise in front of the whole class.
* Consolidation (2’)
* Aim: To consolidate what students have learnt in the lesson.
* Content: summarize the content of the lesson.
* Products: A student says the lesson’s content aloud.
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
- Teacher asks students to talk about what - revise vocabulary and grammar in unit 4
they have learnt in the lesson. - make Project: “My map”
* Homework (2’)
Aim: To revise the knowledge that students have gained in Unit 4 and To prepare for the next
lesson
* Content: Review the lesson and prepare for the next lesson and do exersie in the workbbook
* Products: Students’ textbook and workbook.
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’ activities Content
- Teacher asks students to revise old lesson - Complete the project
and to do exercise in workbook. - Prepare for the next lesson: Unit 5 ( Getting
- Teacher asks students to complete the started)
project and prepare the new lesson.

GV: Phuong Mai –Lesson Plan English 6 122

Planning date:
Week: UNIT 5: NATURAL WONDERS OF VIET NAM
Period: Lesson 1: Getting started – Geography Club!

I. OBJECTIVES:
By the end of the lesson, students will be able to:
- identify the lexical items related to the topic Natural wonders of Viet Nam;
- use the vocabulary and structures to describe wonders of Viet Nam.
II. LANGUAGE ANALYSIS
1. Knowledge:
* Vocabulary: words related to the topic “things in nature” .
* Grammar: Making suggestions - superlatives of short adjectives.
2. Skills: Speaking, writing, listening and reading.
3. Attitude: : Educate Ss to love and conserve the nature.
4. Competences: - Describing natural wonders in the world.
II. MATERIALS
- Grade 6 textbook, Unit 5, Getting started
- Projector/ pictures and cards
- sachmem.vn
IV. PROCEDURES : (STAGES)
1. Warm-up (5’)
* Aim: - to activate students’knowledge on the topic of the unit
To lead in the topic of natural wonders of Viet Nam.
* Content: Look at the pictures and write the name of them.
* Products: Students write correct name on the board.
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
* Warm up: T – SS ( Individual work)
- T - Ss * Game: Famous places in the world
Teacher divides the class into two teams and asks Look at the pictures and write the name of
Ss to look at the pictures about famous places and them.
and write the name of them.
- The team which has more correct will be the
winner.
- Lead in : Today we are going to learn about
“natural wonders of the world”
2. Presentation (5’)
* Aim: to introduce new vocabulary
* Content: learn some vocabularies related to the topic.
* Products: Students read and understand the meaning of vocab.
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
- T - Ss.
* Pre teach vocabulary * Vocabulary
- Teacher use different techniques to teach 1. scenery (n):

GV: Phuong Mai –Lesson Plan English 6 123

vocab (pictures, situation, realia) 2. natural (adj):
- Follow the seven steps of teaching vacab. 3. forest (n):
- Repeat in chorus and individually 4. amazing (adj):
- Copy all the words 5. island (n):
* Checking vocab: < what and where> 6. deser t(n):
7. waterfall (n):
Practice: (20’)
Task 1 (5’)
* Aims: To practice the targeted language and the background knowledge of things in nature.
* Content: Listen and read the conversation
* Products: Students read and understand the meaning of the conversation
Students know how to role play
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
Task 1: T-Ss, Ss-Ss Task 1. Listen and read
Teacher draws students’ attention to the picture
in the textbook and asks them questions about 1. Who are they?
the picture. 2. What are they looking at?
- Tell Ss that Alice, Elena, Nick and Tommy 3. What are they talking about?
are in the Geography Club, talking about 4.
natural wonders of Viet Nam such as Ganh Da Suggested answers:
Dia and Ha Long Bay, and that they are going 1. They are Alice, Elena and Nick.
to listen to their talk. 2. They are looking at some photos/ pictures.
- Play the recording two or three times, or more They are talking about attractive places in Viet
if necessary for Ss to listen and read along. Nam.
- Have Ss underline the words related to the
topic of the unit while they are listening and * Role play.
reading.
- Call on some pairs of Ss to read the
conversation aloud.
Task 2 (7’)
* Aims: - To help Ssunderstand the conversati on better ;
- To help Ss practise using words to describe things in nature.
* Content: Complete the following sentences with the words from the box.
* Products: Student write correct words on the board.
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
Task 2: T-Ss, Ss-Ss Task 2: Complete the following sentences with
- Teacher tells students to read the text again in the words from the box. (p. 49)
order to find the words to complete the * Answer key:
sentences independently. 1. amazing
- Teacher allows students to share their answers 2. islands
before discussing as a class. 3. scenery
- Teacher nominates students to give answers 4. natural
and corrects them if necessary. 5. wonders
Task 3:(5’)
* Aims: To help Ss revise and learn more nouns for things in nature through pictures and listening
exercise.
* Content: Listen and repeat the words, then label the pictures
* Products: Ss give correct answers .
* Organization:
GV: Phuong Mai –Lesson Plan English 6 124
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
- Teacher asks students to look at the words in Task 3: Listen and repeat the words, then label
the box, listen and repeat. the pictures. (p. 49)
- Teacher has students match the pictures with * Answer key:
the appropriate words independently. a. desert
- Teacher allows students to share their answers b. island
before discussing as a class. c. cave
- Teacher asks students to give answers and d. river
corrects them if necessary. e. waterfall
f. mountain
g. forest
h. beach

Production:(5’)

Task 4: (5’)
* Aims: To give students a fun time revising what they have learnt so far in the lesson and more
quickly response the questions about natural wonders.
* Content: QUIZ. Choose the correct answer to each of the questions
* Products: Practise in groups and give correct answers.
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
Task 5 :T-Ss, Ss-Ss Task 4: QUIZ
- Teacher divides the class into groups of four Work in groups. Choose the correct answer to
or five and provides each group with a set of A each of the questions. (p. 49)
and B signs.
- Teacher gives students time to read the quiz 1. Which is an island in Viet Nam?
carefully and choose the correct answers. - A. Con Dao.
-Then, teacher lets students randomly select a 2. Where is Mount Fansipan?
number on the screen to choose the question. - A. In Lao Cai.
- Students raise the correct signs of A or B 3. Which of the following is a national park?
choose the answer and say the answer aloud. - B. Cat Tien Park.
- The quickest group gets 5 points for each 4. Which of the following wonders is a cave?
correct answer. - B. Phong Nha.
- At the end of the activity, 3 groups having the 5. Which is a natural wonder in Australia?
high points are the winners. – B. The Great Barrier Reef.

3. Consolidation (3’)
* Aim: To consolidate what students have learnt in the lesson.
* Content:. Summarize the main content what students have learnt in the lesson.
* Products: Some Ss say aloud in front of the class
* Organization:

Teacher’s and Ss’ activities Content

- Teacher asks students to talk about what they - Some new words
have learnt in the lesson. - Read and understand content of the conversation
- Ss work indepently
4. Homework (2’)
* Aim: To revise the lesson and prepare for the next lesson.
* Content: Review the lesson and prepare for the next lesson ( A closer look 1)

GV: Phuong Mai –Lesson Plan English 6 125

* Products: Students’ textbook and workbook
* Organization
Teacher’s and Ss’ activities Content
- T reminds Ss to do homework and prepare the - Learn by heart all the new words.
new lesson. - Read the dialogue again.
- Prepare lesson 2 ( A closer look 1).

Planning date:
Week: UNIT 5: NATURAL WONDERS OF VIET NAM
Period: Lesson 2: A closer look 1

I. OBJECTIVES:
By the end of the lesson, students will be able to:
- use the lexical items related to the topic Natural wonders of Viet Nam;
- use the vocabularies and structures to talk about famous natural places; pronounce and recognize
the sounds /t/ and /d/.
II. LANGUAGE ANALYSIS
1. Knowledge:
* Vocabulary: words related to the topic “things in nature” and “travel items”
* Grammar: Sounds: /s/ and /st/
2. Skills: Listening and writing
3. Attitude: To teach SS to love travelling.
4. Competences: Knowing the necessary items for travelling; - Co-operation, self- study, using
language to do exercises.
III. MATERIALS
* Preparation:
1. Teacher: Text books , pictures, planning , …
- Grade 6 textbook, Unit 5, A closer look 1
- Smart TV/Pictures, sets of word cards
- sachmem.vn
2. Students: Text books, notebooks, posters, ….
IV. PROCEDURES : (STAGES)
* Warm-up (5’)
* Aim: To activate students’ prior knowledge and vocabulary related to the topic, the targeted
vocabulary and its pronunciation
* Content: Choose correct words and pictures on the board
* Products: Students choose correct words and pictures on the board.( team work)
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
- T - Ss * Game: * PELMANISM
- Teacher divides the class into 2 teams. Example:
- Teacher put 12 sets of numbers, one includes
pictures and the ame of picturess.
- Members from two teams choose the pair of
number .
- The group with the most correct word will be
the winner cave
- T leads in the lesson : These are natural
wonders. If you visit these places, What will
GV: Phuong Mai –Lesson Plan English 6 126
you bring?
- ”“ Now we are going to some vocab about
travel items”
2. Presentation (7’)
(Vocab- pre-teach)
* Aim: To teach students some places and adjectives describing ones in a neighbourhood.
* Content: Some vocab about travelling items.
* Products: read and understand the meaning of vocab.
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
- T - Ss * Vocabulary
* Pre teach vocabulary -plaster (n): miếng dán, gạc y tế
- Teacher use different techniques to teach - sleeping bag (n): túi ngủ
vocab (pictures, situation, explaination …..) - backpack (n): ba lô
- Repeat in chorus and individually - compass (n): la bàn
- Copy all the words - suncream (n): kem chống nắng
* Checking vocab: < Rub out and - scissors (n): cái kéo
remmember>
2. Practice (10’)
Task 1: (5’)
* Aims: To revise/ teach the names of travel items.
* Content: Write a word under each picture. Practise saying the words.
* Products: Students give answers correctly and whole class Practise saying the words.
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
Task 1: T-Ss Task 1: Write a word under each picture.
-Teacher asks students to write the suitable Practise saying the words.
word under each picture in 2 minutes. * Answer key:
- Students do the task. 1. plaster
-Teacher calls some students to give their 2. suncream
answers. 3. sleeping bag
-Teacher gives feedback and corrections (if 4. scissors
necessary). 5. backpack
6. compass
Task2: (5’)
* Aims: To help Ss practise using the travel items in 1 in context.
* Content: Complete the sentences with the words in task 1.
* Products: Ss say the answers ( pair work)correctly aloud
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
Task 2: T - Ss, Ss - Ss Task 2: Complete the sentences with the words in
- Teacher asks students to work in pairs and task 1. (p. 50)
use the words in task 1 to complete the * Answer key:
sentences. 1. compass
- Students work in pairs and do the task. 2. suncream
- Teacher calls some pairs to share their 3. sleeping bag
answers with the whole class. 4. backpack
- Teacher gives feedback and corrections (if 5. plaster
necessary).

Task 3: (5’)
GV: Phuong Mai –Lesson Plan English 6 127
* Aims: To teach students some words/ phrases related to travelling items
* Content: Put the items in order of usefulness. Number 1 is the most useful, number 6 is the least
useful on holiday.
* Products: Students share their answers as a whole class and give comments
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
Task 3:T-Ss, Ss-Ss Task 3: Now put the items in order of usefulness.
- Teacher asks students to work in groups of Number 1 is the most useful, number 6 is the least
three. useful on holiday. (p. 50)
- Teacher gives students 3 minutes to discuss
and put the item in the order of usefulness. * Example:
- Teacher asks students to share their 1. backpack 2. sun cream 3. plaster
answers as a whole class. 4. scissors 5. compass 6. sleeping bag
- Teacher gives corrections (if necessary).
* PRONUNCIATION
(Pre-teach the sounds /t/ and /d/)
* Aims: To help students to identify how to pronounce the sounds /t/ and /d/.
* Content: PRONUNCIATION Sounds /t/ and /d/
* Products: Read and know how to pronounce the sounds
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
Task 4:T-Ss, Ss-Ss
- Teacher introduces 2 sounds /t/ and /d/ to PRONUNCIATION
students and lets them watch a video about * Sounds /t/ and /d/
how to pronounce these two sounds. * Suggested answers:
- Teacher asks students to give some words /t/: plaster, tower, letter, desert, want
they know containing these sounds. /d/: need, island, guide, holiday, pagoda
* Practice
Task 4:(5’)
* Aims: To help students identify and practise the /t/ and /d/ sounds.
* Content: Listen and repeat the words with sounds /t/ and /d/
* Products: Ss pronounce words correctly.
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
Task 4 :T-Ss, Task 4: Listen and repeat the words. (p. 51)
- Teacher asks students listen to the /t/ /d/
recording for the first time.
- Teacher asks students to listen and repeat mountain wonder
the words for the second time. waterfall island
desert guide
plaster holiday
Task 5: (5’)
* Aims: To help students practice the sounds /t/ and /d/ in sentences.
* Content: Listen and repeat. Pay attention to the bold-typed parts of the words
* Products: Whole class practise reading.
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’ activities Content
- Teacher plays the recording for students to Task 5: Listen and repeat. Pay attention to the
listen and asks students to repeat the bold-typed parts of the words. (p. 51)
sentences after they listen.
GV: Phuong Mai –Lesson Plan English 6 128
- Teacher calls some students randomly to 1- Where's my hat? - Oh, it's on your head.
read the sentences and gives correction (if 2. Where do they stay on their holiday?
necessary).. 3. I need some meat for my cat.
4. The Sahara is a very hot desert.
5. I want to explore the island by boat.

3. Production (5’)
* Aim: To give students chance to apply what they have learnt.
* Content: Game: Whispering
* Products: Students plays on groups.
* Organization:

- Teacher divides the class into 4 big groups * Game: Whispering

and asks students to stand in four lines. * Suggested sentences:
- The member in the last place will make a 1. I must bring a plaster when going camping.
sentence containing at least a word and a 2. I want to visit a famous desert in the world.
sound they have learnt; then, whisper the 3. He lives in a quiet island.
sentence to the next member of the group.
They will continue until the member in the
first place and this member will say the
sentence aloud.
- The fastest group will win the game.

4. Consolidation(3’)
* Aim: To consolidate what students have learnt in the lesson.
* Content: Vocab and how to pronounce the sounds /t/ and /d/.
* Products: Say aloud some words they remember from the lesson.
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’ activities Content
- Teacher asks students to talk about what - Vocabulary and how to pronounce the sound /t/
they have learnt in the lesson and /d/.

5. Homework (2’)
* Aim: To revise what they have learnt and prepare for the next lesson.
* Content: Review the lesson and prepare for the next lesson and do exersie in the workbbook
* Products: Students’ textbook and workbook
* Organization:

Teacher’s and Ss’ activities Content

- T reminds Ss to do homework and prepare - Learn by heart all the new words.
the new lesson. - Find 5 more words with the sound /t/ and 5 more
words with the sound /d/.
- Prepare lesson 3 ( A closer look 2)..

GV: Phuong Mai –Lesson Plan English 6 129

Planning date:
Week: UNIT 5: NATURAL WONDERS OF VIET NAM
Period: Lesson 3: A closer look 2

I. OBJECTIVES:
By the end of the lesson, students will be better able to:
- use countable nouns and uncountable nouns;
- use quantifiers some, many, much, a few, a little with countable nouns and countable nouns;
- use “must” and “mustn’t” to make classroom rules.
II. LANGUAGE ANALYSIS
1. Knowledge:
* Vocab: lexical items related to the lesson.
* Grammar: Countable & uncountable nouns; Modal verbs: must and musn’t
2. Skills: Listening ,writing and reading
3. Attitude: To teach SS to work hard and love travelling.
4. Competences: Know how to use countable nouns and uncountable nouns;
use quantifiers some, many, much, a few, a little and use “must” and “mustn’t” .
III. MATERIALS
* Preparation:
1. Teacher: Text books , pictures, planning , …
- Grade 6 textbook, Unit 5, A closer look 2
- Smart TV/Pictures, sets of word cards
- sachmem.vn
2. Students: Text books, notebooks, posters, ….
IV. PROCEDURES: (STAGES)
* Warm-up (5’)
* Aim: To put students into English mode; attentive, interested and ready to participate and
prime the class for a new topic.
* Content: Game: Unscrambled words
* Products: Ss write words in correct group.
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
* Warm up (group work) * Game: Unscrambled words
- T - Ss Giaoandethitienganh.info
- Teacher divides the class into groups of 3-6 1. cream 5. juice
students. 2. rock 6. butter
- Teacher delivers a set of unscrambled words 3. island 7.backpack

GV: Phuong Mai –Lesson Plan English 6 130

which are some countable and uncountable 4. rice 8. plaster
nouns to each group. * Answer key:
- Students will have to work in groups to solve The words “cream, rice, juice, butter” are
the quiz. uncountable nouns.
- The group with more correct sentences will be The words “rock, island, backpack,
the winner. plaster” are countable nouns.

- Teacher provides or confirms the answers and

lead in the grammar focus of the lesson:
- Lead in
Today we are going to learn more about
countable and uncountable nouns.
1. Presentation 1 (10’)
* Aim: To elicit/ show the students when and how the uncountable and countable nouns are used
in sentences as well as when and how the quantifiers are used.
* Content: Grammar: Countable and Uncountable nouns:
* Products: Understand ans know how to use Countable and Uncountable nouns.
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
* Pre – grammar. * GRAMMAR:
- T - Ss 1/ Countable and Uncountable nouns:
- Teacher draws students’ attention to the
underlined words and confirm the use of - “Countable nouns are for the people and things
countable and uncountable nouns we can count using numbers. Countable nouns
can be singular."
- “Uncountable nouns are for the things that we
cannot count with numbers. They usually do not
-Teacher then asks students to give some have a plural form.”
more examples of uncountable nouns that
they know. 1. uncountable nouns don't have a plural form:
- Teacher reminds students to the “definition cream, chocolate,...
of countable nouns” 2. countable nouns can be singular: a rock, an
island ..., or plural: rocks, islands...
- T explains the usage and the form.
- Ss listen and copy down.
Task 1: - T - Ss Task 1: Is the underlined noun countable or
- Teacher has students complete the uncountable? Write C (countable) or U
underlined activity individually. (uncountable). (p. 51)
- Teacher then asks students to swap their Answer key:
textbooks to check their classmates’ 1–C 2–U 3–U 4–C 5–U
answers.
Controlled practice 1
Task 2 (5 ’)
* Aims: To check if students can use countable, uncountable nouns and quantifiers correctly.
* Content: Choose the correct option for each sentence.
* Products: Students say the correct keys aloud.
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
Task 2:T –Ss : Task 2: Choose the correct option for each
- Teacher has students work on the exercise sentence. (p. 52)

GV: Phuong Mai –Lesson Plan English 6 131

individually before they compare answers Answer key:
with each other. 1. A
- Teacher gives feedback as a class 2. B
discussion. 3. A
4. B
5. A
Presentation 2 (5)’
* Aims: To help how to use and practise “a, any, some, much, or many ”with countable and
uncountable nouns in context.
* Content: Grammar: Some, many, much, a few, a little:
* Products: Understand and know how to use Some, many, much, a few, a little:
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content

2/ Some, many, much, a few, a little:

- Teacher gives students a handout of each * Answer key:
definition of each quantifiers. How to use: Some, many, much, a few, a little:
- Teacher has students work in groups of 4 to
match the words in column A with QUANTIFIERS USE
definitions in column B. 1. many countable nouns, usually
in negative statements and
questions
Teacher then asks students to exchange their 2. much uncountable nouns,
handout to check their classmates’ answers usually in negative
statements and questions
- T explains the usage and the form. 3. a few countable nouns, means
- Ss listen and copy down. ‘some’
4. a little uncountable nouns, means
‘some’
5. some countable nouns,
uncountable nouns
* Controlled practice 2
Task 3: Fill each blank with a, any, some,
- Ss work in pairs. Tell them to read the much, or many.
sentences carefully and find the right
words to complete the sentences. Key: 1. Many 2. Any 3. Much 4 . some 5. a
- Check the answers as a class
Presentation 3
* Aims: To elicit/ show the students when must and mustn't are used and how to make a sentence
with these modals.
* Content: Grammar: Modal verb: must / mustn’t
* Products: Understand and know how to use must / mustn’t
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content

T - Ss 3/ Modal verb: must / mustn’t

- Ask Ss to recall the conversation from + Form: . subject + must + base form
GETTING STARTED: Alice - the leader subject + mustn’t + base form
of the Geography Club tells Elena: But
remember you must always be on time. + Usage:
Alternatively,T may ask Ss such questions: - We use must to say that something is very
GV: Phuong Mai –Lesson Plan English 6 132
Are you sometimes late for class?What necessary or very important.
does your teacher say? - We use mustn’t to say that doing something is
Then encourage Ss to answer, using must I not allowed.
mustn't.
For a weaker class,T may call on some Ss
to give the Vietnamese equivalent of must
I mustn't.
Tell Ss to study the Remember! box, then
give the rules of the modal verb must I
mustn't.T may give some examples to
clarify the use of must I mustn't to Ss.
Task 4: (5’)
* Aims: To help Ss practise using must / mustn't in context.
* Content: Fill each blank with must or mustn't.
* Products: Say the correct answers aloud.
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
* T-Ss, Ss-Ss - Task 4: Fill each blank with must or mustn't.
- - Teacher has students work on the * Answer key:
exercise individually before they compare 1. must
answers with each other. 2. musn’t
- Teacher gives feedback as a class 3. must
discussion. 4. mustn’t
5. must

Freer Practice 2
Task 5 ( 5’)
* Aims: Togive Ss m o re practice on using must or mustn't in the real context of their
classroom.
* Content: Read the classroom rules below. Write some more rules for you and your classmates
* Products: Read their sentences in front of the class.
* Organization:

Teacher’s and Ss’ activities Content

- Ask Ss to study sentence 1 (positive), 1. Read the classroom rules below. Write some
and sentence 2 (negative). more rules for you and your classmates.
Then ask them to think of the classroom
rules (what they must do and what they 1. We must arrive school on time.
mustn't do) and complete the sentences 3 2. We mustn't get out of class before breaktime.
and 4, and write their own sentences for 5. 3. We must raise our hands when we want to ask
- Ss can share their ideas in pairs, and give questions in classroom.
as many sentences as possible. 4. We musn't gossip in class.
- Call on some Ss to read their sentences 5. We must be gentle with each other.
in front of the class. Discuss answers as a 6. We mustn't eat during lesson.
class.

5. Consolidation (3’)
* Aim: To consolidate what students have learnt in the lesson.
* Content: summarize the main content in the lesson.
* Products: Ss say what they have learnt in the lesson.
* Organization:
GV: Phuong Mai –Lesson Plan English 6 133
Teacher’s and Ss’ activities Content
Teacher asks students to talk about what they + Grammar: countable nouns and uncountable
have learnt in the lesson. nouns;
- quantifiers some, many, much, a few, a little
- “must” and “mustn’t”
+ form and usage.
4. Homework (2’)
* Aim: To revise the knowledge that students have gained in this lesson and prepare the new
lesson
* Content: Review the lesson and prepare for the next lesson and do exersie in the workbbook
* Products: Students’ textbook and workbook
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’ activities Content
- T reminds Ss to do homework and prepare - Do exercises in the workbook.
the new lesson. - Prepare lesson 4 ( communication)

Planning date:
Week: UNIT 5: NATURAL WONDERS OF VIET NAM
Period: Lesson 4 : Communication
I. OBJECTIVES:
By the end of the lesson, students will be able to:
- make and accept appointments;
- have knowledge about a travel guide;
- use must and mustn’t to talk about what to prepare for a trip.
II. LANGUAGE ANALYSIS
1. Knowledge:
* Vocab: lexical items related to the lesson.
* Grammar: Making and accepting appointments.
2. Skills: Reading and speaking
3. Attitude: To teach SS to work hard and love travelling.
4. Competences : develop reading, speaking and co-operating skills. summarizing ;
III. MATERIALS
* Preparation:
1. Teacher: Text books , pictures, planning , …
- Grade 6 textbook, Unit 5, communication
- Smart TV/Pictures, sets of word cards
- sachmem.vn
2. Students: Text books, notebooks, posters, ….
IV. PROCEDURES : (STAGES)
1.Warm-up (5’)
* Aim: To review must and mustn’t.
To lead in the lesson about vocabulary and pronunciation.
* Content: * GAME: Pass the ball (make a sentence with must/ mustn’t)
* Products: Ss play in group and say a sentence with must/ mustn’t aloud
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
* Warm up * GAME: Pass the ball
- T – Ss
- Teacher plays the music. When music’s on,
GV: Phuong Mai –Lesson Plan English 6 134
students pass the ball as fast as they can.
- When music’s off, the student taking the ball
has to make a sentence with must/ mustn’t.

- Lead in:
- Teacher sets the scene.
- They are Duong and Steven. Steven wants
Duong to go picnic with him this Sunday.
What structures can he use? If Duong agrees,
what does he say?
- Students give their answers.
Teacher leads students into the lesson by telling
about what they are going to learn: “We are
going to learn how to make and accept
appointments
2. Presentation ( 5’)
* EVERYDAY ENGLISH
* Making and accepting appointments

Task 1: (5’)
* Aim: To introduce how to make and accept appointmen
* Content: Listen and read the short conversation, paying attention how to make and accept
appointments
* Products: Understand and know how to make and accept appointments;

* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
Task 1:T –Ss Task 1: Listen and read the short conversation,
- Teacher asks students listen and read the paying attention to the highlighted parts.
short conversation, paying attention to the  Making appointments:
highlighted parts. Let’s + V.
- Teacher writes down highlighted parts on How about …?
the board and asks students what they are  Accepting appointments:
used to, which is used to make That’s fine.
appointments and which is used to Sure.
accepting appointments.
- Teacher calls some students to share their
opinions.
- Teacher gives more explanations and elicit
the form.

3. Practice (20’)

Task 2: (5’)
* Aims: To practice making and accepting appointments.
* Content: Make a short conversation, following the example in Task 1.
* Products: Some pairs to make a conversation in front of the class.
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
Task 2:T –Ss : Ss- Ss Task 2: Work in pairs. Make a short conversation,
GV: Phuong Mai –Lesson Plan English 6 135
- Teacher asks students to work in pairs following the example in Task 1.
and make a short conversation, following - Example:
the example. Huy: Nam, let's go to the supermarket this Sunday
- Teacher models with a volunteer. morning.
- Students do the task in pairs. Nam: That's great. What time can we meet?
- Teacher calls some pairs to make a Huy: How about 8 o'clock?
conversation in front of the class. Nam: Sure, I'll meet you at that time.
- Teacher gives feedback and corrections
(if necessary).

Pre-Reading
* A TOUR GUIDE
* Aims: To help students set the scene.
* Content: * Chatting: Look at the picture and answer the question.
* Products: Ss say the answers aloud.
* Organization:

Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content

Task 3: T - Ss, * Chatting: Look at the picture and answer the
- Teacher shows the picture and ask question.
students some questions:
Next week, I am going mountain climbing.
Can you guess where I am going to?
(Himalayas)
Before we go, what should we read? A
-Can you guess where I am going to? (Himalayas)
tour guide
What information can you read in a tour
guide?
While-Reading (8’)

Task 3:(5’)
* Aims: To help students have knowledge about a travel guide.
* Content: Read the travel guide entry, Make a list of the things you must bring to the Himalayas.
* Product: Read and understand the text; calls some groups to give their correct answers
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
Task 3: T – Ss. Task 3: Read the travel guide entry. (p. 53)

Teacher asks students to read the travel

guide entry to check their guess and sets
the time limit for reading task for 2
minutes.

Task 4: T - Ss, Ss – Ss Task 4: Make a list of the things you must bring to
the Himalayas. Then add things you mustn’t bring.
(p. 53)
MUST MUSTN’T
- In group of 3, students write as many
things they must and mustn’t bring to the
Himalayas as they can in 2 minutes. - compass - bicycle
Teacher calls some groups to give their - sleeping bag - shorts
GV: Phuong Mai –Lesson Plan English 6 136
answers and checks. - plaster - T-shirt
- packback
- waterproof coat
Post-Reading
Task(5’)
* Aims: To help students talk about what to prepare for a trip
* Content: Role-play being a tour guide and a tourist.
Tell your partner what to prepare for their trip to the Himalayas, and give reasons
* Products: Role –play in front of the class.
* Organization:

Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content

Task 5: T - Ss, Ss – Ss Task 5: Role-play being a tour guide and a tourist.
Tell your partner what to prepare for their trip
- Teacher divide the class into 2 main to the Himalayas, and give reasons.
group. One is a tour guide and one is a Example:
tourist. A: I'd like to go to the Himalayas next month.
- The tourist prepares the questions and B: OK. I think you must bring a waterproof coat. It's
the tour guide prepare the information in cold and rainy there!
2 minutes. A: Yes. Anything else?
- Students work in pair. Make a B: You must bring a sleeping bag so that you can stay
conversation. here overnight. You must also bring a compass in case
- Teacher calls some pairs to talk in front you are lost.
of the class. A: Is there anything I mustn’t bring?
- Peer check and then teacher gives B: Well, you mustn’t bring bicycle because you can’t
feedback ride it here and it’s very cold, so you mustn’t bring
shorts or T- shirt.
A: Thanks a lot.

5. Consolidation (3’)
* Aims: To consolidate what students have learnt in the lesson.
* Content: Summarize the content of the lesson.
* Products: Ss say aloud what they have just learnt .
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
Teacher asks students to talk about what - Making and accepting appointments
they have learnt in the lesson. - Read the travel guide
- Make a list of the things you must or mustn’t when
traveling.
6. Homework (2’)
* Aim: To revise the knowledge that students have gained in this lesson. And prepare for the next
lesson: Skills 1.
* Content: Review the lesson and prepare for the next lesson and do exersie in the workbbook
* Products: Students’ textbook and workbook
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’ activities Content
- T reminds Ss to do homework and - Learn by heart the structures about making and
prepare the new lesson. accepting appointments.
- To prepare for the next lesson: Unit 4 My
neighbourhood / Skills 1.

GV: Phuong Mai –Lesson Plan English 6 137

Planning date:
Week: UNIT 5: NATURAL WONDERS OF VIET NAM
Period: Lesson 5 : Skills 1

I. OBJECTIVES:
By the end of the lesson, students will be able to:
- develop reading skill for general and specific information about the topic;
- use the lexical items related to the topic ‘things in nature’ and ‘travel items’;
use what they have learnt to talk about a famous place, and what people must/ mustn’t do there.
II. LANGUAGE ANALYSIS
1. Knowledge:
* Vocabulary: lexical items related to the lesson.
* Grammar: Modal Verb: must in advice
2. Skills: Reading and speaking
3. Attitude: To teach SS to work hard and love travelling..
4. Competences: develop reading, speaking and co-operating skills; Talk and give travel advice
III. MATERIALS
* Preparation:
1. Teacher: Text books , pictures, planning , …
- Grade 6 textbook, Unit 5, skills 1
- Smart TV/Pictures, sets of word cards
- sachmem.vn
2. Students: Text books, notebooks, posters, ….
IV. PROCEDURES : (STAGES)
1. Warm-up (5’)
* Aim: To introduce the topic of reading.
* Content: Game: Hidden picture.
* Products: Students’ answers.
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content

GV: Phuong Mai –Lesson Plan English 6 138

- T- Ss Game: Hidden picture.
* Set the scene.
- Teacher sets the scene: “Next month, I am
going travelling. Guess where I will visit.”
- Let’s students guess the places by opening
the boxes one by one. The pictures are
hidden behind the boxes.
- Teacher shows the pictures on the screen.
- Teacher leads in the lesson by asking
questions: - Have you ever been to these places?”
“Today, let’s see what do they have.”
2. Presentation (7’)
* Aim:. To provide students with some lexical items before reading the text.
* Content: Learn some vocab related the topic.
* Products: Read and understand the meaning of words.
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
T –Ss : * VOCABULARY
- Pre teach vocabulary - tourist attraction (n) : điểm thu hút khách du lịch
- Teacher use different techniques to teach - popular (adj): phổ biến
vocab (pictures, situation, explaination…..) - landscape (n) : phong cảnh
- Repeat in chorus and individually - slope (n) : dôc, sườn
- Copy all the words - sand dune (n) : cồn cát
* Checking vocab: *Checking: Matching
3. Pre -reading (5’)
Task 1: * Discussing:
* Aims: To activate Ss' knowledge of the topic in the reading text.
* Content: Look at the pictures and answer some questions.
* Products: Ss say the answers aloud.
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
Task 1:T –Ss . * Discussing:
- Teacher asks students to close the book. Task 1: Look at the pictures and make predictions
- Teacher shows the pictures of the places about the reading. (p. 54)
and asks students to answer the 1. What are the places?
questions: 2. What do you know about these places?

- Teacher invites some students to share

their discussion in front of the class.
- Teacher asks students to open the book.
Read the text and check their ideas.
4. While-Reading (5’)
Task 2
* Aims: To check students understanding of using correct lexical items about the topic.
* Content: Complete the sentences, using the words from the box.
* Products: students swap their answers with their partner and say the correct answers.
* Organization :
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
- Teacher askes students to do Exercise 2 Task 2. Complete the sentences, using the words
individually, in 3 minutes. from the box. (p. 54)
After 3 minutes, teacher lets students swap * Answer key:
GV: Phuong Mai –Lesson Plan English 6 139
their answers with their partner. 1. islands
Check the answers. 2. wonder
3. desert
4. Remember
5. visit

5. While-Reading (5’)
Task 3:
* Aims: To develop reading skill for general and specific information.
* Content: Read the text and answer the questions.
* Products: Students play game by answering the questions correctly.
* Organization :
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
Task 3: T - Ss, Ss – Ss Task 3: Read the text and answer the following
- T has Ss anser the questions by playing questions. (p. 54)
game : Lucky number. Class is divided into * Answer key:
2 groups. 1. Ha Long Bay is in Quang Ninh.
- Teacher prepares 7 numbers which 2. You can enjoy great seafood and join in exciting
includes 5 questions about their school, activities.
and 2 lucky numbers. 3. No, there isn’t. It’s like a desert, not a real desert.
- Each team takes turns and chooses a 4. You can have a picnic in Mui Ne by the beach.
number and answers the question behind 5. The best time to visit the Mui Ne Sand Dunes is
the number. If the team answers the early morning or late afternoon.
question correctly, they will get 1 point.
If the team chooses the lucky number,
they get 1 point without answering the
question and may choose another
number.
5. Post reading (5’) + Pre -speaking
Task 4
* Aims: To check students’ reading comprehension and prepare for the next part.
* Content: Make notes about one of the places in the reading
* Products: Students’ answers on the posters.
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
Task 4: T - Ss, Ss – Ss Task 4: Work in pairs. Make notes about one of
-Teacher asks students to work in groups the places in the reading. You can add your own
of 3 and make notes about one place in the ideas. (p. 54)
reading. Ha Long Bay Mui Ne
- Compare the notes with other groups.
Teacher asks students to tell their partner - interesting islands - a beautiful places
about the place by looking at the notes. - many islands and caves - amazing landscapes
- beautiful beaches - different colour
- Teacher goes around and offers help if - great seafood - like a desert
needed. - exciting activities - many activities
- Students share their ideas with the whole * Example:
class. Ha Long Bay has a lot of interesting islands. It also
has many caves and beautiful beaches. You can enjoy
great seafood here and take part in exciting activities
6. While –Speaking (5’)
Task 5:
GV: Phuong Mai –Lesson Plan English 6 140
* Aims: To help students form the ideas for their speaking.
* Content: Some foreign visitors are visiting your city/ town/ area. You are their tour guide. Tell
them some interesting things about the place as well as what they must and mustn’t do there.
* Products: Students’ idea in groups and share with the class.
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
T - Ss, Ss – Ss Task 5: Some foreign visitors are visiting your
Teacher askes students to work in groups city/ town/ area. You are their tour guide. Tell
of 5. them some interesting things about the place as
+ Leader? well as what they must and mustn’t do there.
+ Idea thinkers?
+ Presenters? + Where is it?
+ Drawers? + What does it have?
+ Are there any interesting things here?
- Teacher asks students to choose a famous + What must they do or mustn’t do there?
place in their city or area.
- Teacher asks students to discuss and * Example:
make notes of the information they want - You must wear sun scream when you're in My Khe
to share with the class. beach
- Teacher asks students to refer to the - You must go to the My Khe beach in late afternoon
questions as suggestions for their notes or - You mustn't litter on the beach.
they can do it in their own way. - You mustn't swim alone
- Teacher goes around and offers help if
needed.
7. Post-Speaking (3’)
* Aims: To help students use what they have learnt so far to talk about a famous place
To help students improve next time.
* Content: Students Tell some interesting things about the place as well as what they must and
mustn’t do there.
* Products: Some students share their preparation with the whole class.
* Organization:

Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content

- Teacher asks students to practice
presenting in their groups. * Students’ presentation
- Teacher makes sure that students speak in
full sentences.
- Then, teacher invites some groups to go
to the board and share their preparation
with the whole class.
- - Teacher allows students to give
comments for their friends and vote for
the most interesting and informative
presentation.
- Teacher gives feedback and comments.

GV: Phuong Mai –Lesson Plan English 6 141

7. Consolidation (2’)
* Aims: To consolidate what students have learnt in the lesson.
* Content: Ss summarise what they have learnt with the two skills.
* Products: Students say what they have learnt with the two skills in font of the class.
* Organization:

Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content

- Teacher asks students to talk about what - 2 skills ( talk about some famous places )
they have learnt in the lesson.
8. Homework (2’)
* Aim: To revise the knowledge that students have gained in this lesson.
* Content: Review the lesson and prepare for the next lesson .
* Products: Students’ textbook and workbook
* Organization:

- Teacher asks students to prepare the new - Do Ex inWB

lesson - Practice speaking a place you like.
- Prepare: Skills 2

Planning date:
Week: UNIT 5: NATURAL WONDERS OF VIET NAM
Period: Lesson 6: Skills 2

I. OBJECTIVES:
By the end of the lesson, students will be able to listening for specific information about a natural
wonder; writing a paragraph about a natural wonder.
II. LANGUAGE ANALYSIS
1. Knowledge:
* Vocabulary: words related to the topic “things in nature” and “travel items”
* Grammar: Making suggestions, superlatives.
2. Skills: Listening and writing
3. Attitude: To teach SS to work hard and love travelling.
4. Competences: Co-operation, self- study; Students will be developed listening and writing
skills.
III. MATERIALS
* Preparation:
1. Teacher: Text books , pictures, planning , …
- Grade 6 textbook, Unit 5, Skills 2
- Smart TV/Pictures.
- sachmem.vn
2. Students: Text books, notebooks, posters, ….
IV. PROCEDURES : (STAGES)
1.Warm –up (5’)
GV: Phuong Mai –Lesson Plan English 6 142
* Aim: To help Ss know some famous places
To introduce about the destination in the talk.
* Content: Look at the pictures and name the places in the pictures
* Products: Ss say the correct answers aloud.
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
* Warm up * Game :
Look at the pictures and name the places in
- T - Ss the pictures
- Teacher encourages students to complete the
task individually.
- Teacher asks students to name the places in
the pictures.
- Teacher shows the answer and check.

 Lead in:
- T shows a picture on the screen and asks
Guess the name of the destination. * Answer key:
1. Ha Long Bay 2. Hue 3. Ha Noi
Today we are going to listen to a talk about 4. Mui Ne 5. Vung tau 6. Sa Pa
a famous natural wonder of Viet Nam. It’s
Phu Quoc Island.

Phu Quoc Island

1. Pre-Listening (5’)

Task 1: (5’)
* Aim: To help students brainstorm about destination in the talk.
* Content: Discuss and answer the question.
* Products: Students’ answers on the posters.
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
- Teacher asks students to work in groups Task 1: Work in groups. Discuss and answer
of four to answer the question: the question. (p. 55)
“What do you know about Phu Quoc “What do you know about Phu Quoc Island?”
Island?” * Suggested answers:
- Teacher asks students to talk in - a beautiful island in Viet Nam.
Vietnamese (sometimes) if they do not - the night market,
have enough vocabulary in English. - The food is delicious
- Teacher asks students to share what they - In Kien Giang province
have discussed to see what they know
about Phu Quoc Island. * Listen to the talk and check your answers.
- Play the recording one or two times for
Ss to check their answers.

GV: Phuong Mai –Lesson Plan English 6 143

3. While -listening ( 10’)

Task 2 (5’)
* Aims: To help students develop listening skill for specific information (T / F).
* Content: Listen and tick True or False.
* Products: Listen, understand and say the answer correctly.
* Organization:

Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content

Task 2: T - Ss, Ss - Ss Task 2: Listen and tick True or False.
* True – False prediction:
- Teacher plays the recording once or Answer key:
twice. 1. T
- Teacher asks students to listen and tick 2. F (It has beautiful beaches and green forest.)
the answers. 3. T
- Teacher asks students to compare their 4. F (Sailing and fishing are popular water
answers with the prediction made sports.)
previously. 5. T
- Teacher calls on some students to read
aloud their answers and correct the false
one(s).
- Teacher checks students’ answers as a
class.
Post-Listening
Task 3: (5’)
* Aims: To help students develop their skill of listening for specific information
* Content: Listen again and fill in the blanks.
* Products: Play game in groups and say the correct answer .
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
- T-Ss, Ss-Ss( work group) EX: Listen again and fill in the blanks.
- Ask students to study the phrases with the * Game: Lucky number
blanks carefully. Students may work in 1. Phu Quoc has beautiful ……….. and green
pairs to discuss the answers from the forests.
information they have listened. 2. It also has………………, hotels, and bars
- Play the recording again and have 3. Phu Quoc has an international……………
students write the answers as they listen. 4. Tourists can visit fishing villages, national
- T can have SS fill in the blanks by parks, ……………and temples
playing game : Lucky number. 5. Sailing and fishing are …………water sports
- Class is divided into 2 groups.
- Teacher prepares 7 numbers which * Audio script:
includes 5 questions about their school, Phu Quoc is a very beautiful island in Viet Nam.
and 2 lucky numbers. It is in Kien Giang. It has beautiful beaches and
- Each team takes turns and chooses a green forests. It also has resorts, hotels, and
number and answers the question behind bars. The people here are friendly. Phu Quoc has
the number. If the team answers the an international airport, and travelling there is
question correctly, they will get 1 point. If easy. Tourists can visit fishing villages, national
the team chooses the lucky number, they parks, pagodas and temples. They also like to eat
get 1 point without answering the the seafood here. It is delicious. Sailing and
question and may choose another number. fishing are popular water sports. You can buy
interesting things at the markets on the island.
GV: Phuong Mai –Lesson Plan English 6 144
-
4. Pre -writing (5’)
Task 3:
* Aims: To help students talk about a travel attraction they know and collect information for
their later writing.
* Content: Fill each blank in the network with the information about a travel attraction you
know.
* Products: Ss fill the information exactly and present in front of the class.
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
Task 3: Fill each blank in the network with
– T - Ss, Ss-Ss the information about a travel attraction you

-Teacher models the task by summarizing

the information of the talk with a student
using the questions in the network below:

- Teacher asks students to choose a travel

attraction they know and individually
brainstorm about that place using the know.
network in Task 3. * Suggested answers:
T: What is the name of the attraction?
- Teacher goes round and help if needed. Ss: It’s Phu Quoc island
Teacher asks students to work in groups of T: Where is it?
four to introduce about their chosen places Ss: It’s in Kien Giang
using the filled network. T: How can you go there?
- Teacher asks 1-2 students to stand up and Ss: You can fly to the island because it has an
talk about their chosen place then give them international airport.
comments. T: What can you do there?
Ss: I can visit the fishing villages, the national
parks, beautiful beaches, temples, pagodas, etc. I
can enjoy some water sports like Sailing and
fishing or buy interesting things at the night
market.
T: What is special about it?
Ss: It’s one of the most famous natural wonders
of Viet Nam and thousands of tourists visit it
every year.
5. While-Writing (5’)
* Aims: To teach students how to write a paragraph about 50 words about a travel attraction
they know.
* Content: Write a paragraph about 50 words about a travel attraction you know
* Products: Students’ perfect writing on the posters.
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
- T-Ss, Ss-Ss Task 4: Write a paragraph about 50 words
- Teacher shows the picture in Task 4 and about a travel attraction you know. Use the
explains to students that they should begin information in Task 3.
the paragraph with a topic sentence for

GV: Phuong Mai –Lesson Plan English 6 145

- Teacher asks students to use ideas they
have brainstormed to write a paragraph
about 50 words about a travel attraction
they know.
- Teacher goes round and help if needed.

* Example:
I am writing about Ly Son island. It is a beautiful
island in Quang Ngai province. And it’s not far
from here . You can go there by ship . It is a
pristine island with exotic seafood. Ly Son island
is famous for its friendliness, long beautiful
beaches, and being “the kingdom of garlic.”
There you can enjoy great Vietnamese seafood;
Especially King crab. You can go diving and
swimming. You can join exciting activities. I
think, you should have a visit to Ly Son.

6. Post-Writing (5’)
* Aim: To peer check, cross check and final check students’ writing.
* Content: Cross check students’ writing.
* Products: Students’ writing and cross check. (individual work)
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
- T-Ss, Ss-Ss Task 5: Students’ writing and cross check.
- Teacher asks students to exchange their * Model writing:
textbooks to check their friends’ writing. I am writing about Ha Long Bay.
- Teacher then gives feedback as a class It is in Quang Ninh province. It’s very far from
discussion. here
- about 500 kilomiters, so you can go there by
bus or by train. Ha long Bay has many caves and
islands. Tuan Chau is the biggest island in Ha
Long Bay. You must take a boat ride around the
islands. There you can enjoy great Vietnamese
seafood. You can watch traditional dance. You
can join exciting activities. Ha Long Bay is
Vietnam’s most beautiful natural wonder.

* Consolidation (2’)
* Aim: To consolidate what students have learnt in the lesson.
* Content: summarize the content of the lesson.
* Products: A student says what she/ he has learnt in the lesson.
* Organization:

Teacher’s and Ss’ activities Content

- Teacher asks students to talk about what - listening for specific information about a
they have learnt in the lesson. natural wonder;
GV: Phuong Mai –Lesson Plan English 6 146
- writing a paragraph about a natural wonder..
* Homework (2’)
* Aim: To revise knowledge that students have gained in this lesson.
* Content: Review the lesson and prepare for the next lesson and do exersie in the workbbook
* Products: Students’ textbook and workbook
* Organization

- Teacher asks students to rewrite their - Rewrite the writing in the notebook.
writing in their books. - Prepare “ Looking back and project”
- Teacher asks students to prepare the new
lesson.

Planning date:
Week: UNIT 5: NATURAL WONDERS OF VIET NAM
Period: Lesson 7: Looking back and project

I. OBJECTIVES:
By the end of the lesson, students will be able to:
- review language use and skills student have learned in Unit 5;
- apply what they have learnt (vocabulary and grammar) into practice through a project.
II. LANGUAGE ANALYSIS
1. Knowledge:
* Vocabulary: words related to the topic “things in nature” and “travel items”
* Grammar: revise the use of must /mustn't and countable and uncountable nouns
2. Skills: Listening and writing
3. Attitude: To teach SS to work hard and love travelling.
4. Competences: Ss will be developed speaking, writing and co-operating skills when doing
project.
III. MATERIALS
* Preparation:
1. Teacher: Text books , pictures, planning , …
- Grade 6 textbook, Unit 5 , Looking back and project
- Smart TV/Pictures.
- sachmem.vn
2. Students: Text books, notebooks, posters, ….
IV. PROCEDURES : (STAGES)
* Check- up (5’)
* Aim: To revise the vocabulary related to the topic and lead in the next part of the lesson.
* Content: Game : Brainstorming ( things in nature and travel items)
* Products: Students work group and write the correct answers on the board.
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
* Warm up (Team work)
T can have Ss listen to an EL song * Game : Brainstorming:
- T –Ss.

GV: Phuong Mai –Lesson Plan English 6 147

- Teacher divides the class into 2 big teams A
and B.
- Then, teacher asks students to work in
groups of 6.
- Write 2 main words on the board.

- One team (team A) finds all the words

related to things in nature. Another team
(team B) finds all the travel items they
know.
- Teacher asks students to make a web map in
2 minutes, try to add as many words as * Suggested answers:
possible. + Things in nature: desert, forest, mountain,
- The fastest group with the most correct lake, river, valley, cave, island, beach,…
answers is the winner. + Travel items: lighter, scissors, sleeping bag,
compass, plastic, backpack,….

* VOCABULARY
Task 1,2,3 (12’)
* Aim: To help students revise the vocabulary items they have learnt in the unit.
* Content: Write the name for each picture
* Products: Ss say the correct words aloud for each picture.
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
Task 1: Task 1: Write the name for each picture.
- T –Ss : * Answer key:
- Teacher encourages students to complete 1. waterfall
the task individually. 2. cave
- Teacher asks students to swap their 3. desert
books with their partners. 4. lake
Teacher shows the answer and check 5. beach
6. island

Task 2: Task 2: Match the name of a natural wonder

- T –Ss : on column A with a word indicating it in
- Teacher asks students to work in pairs. column B.
- Teacher monitors the activity lets them Answer key:
do it in 2 minutes. 1. d
- Teacher lets each pair answer. 2. c
- Teacher checks the answers with the 3. a
whole class. 4. e
5. f
Task 3: 6. b
- T –Ss : Task 3: Write the words under the pictures.
- Teacher asks students to do this exercise Answer key:
individually. 1. scissors
2. sleeping bag
GV: Phuong Mai –Lesson Plan English 6 148
- Teacher lets students compare their 3. compass
answers in pairs before checking as a 4. backpack
class. 5. plaster

* GRAMMAR (10’)
Task 4+ Task 5

* Aims: To help Ss revise the use of countable and uncountable nouns in sentences.
Tohelp Ss revise the use of must /mustn't in context.
* Content: Find the mistake in each sentence and correct it.
* Products: Students read the sentences carefully and correct the mistakes.
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
- Task 4: Task 4: Find the mistake in each sentence
T –Ss ; Ss – Ss and correct it. (p. 56)
- Teacher asks students to work * ANSWER KEY:
independently. 1. is / are
- Teacher asks students to read the sentences 2. are / is
carefully and correct the mistakes. 3. instrument instruments
- Students complete the task and discuss 4. are / is
about the answers. 5. luggages / luggage
- Teacher gives feedback as a class
discussion. Task 5: Complete the dialogue, using must /
mustn’t. (p. 56)
Task5: * Answer key:
T - Ss, Ss – Ss 1. must
- Teacher lets students to work in pairs and 2. must
complete the activity. 3. mustn’t
- Teacher asks students to stand up and make 4. must
a role play. 5. mustn’t
- Teacher checks the answers with the whole
class.

3 . Production(3’):
* Aims: To give Ss further practice on using countable and uncountable nouns and mustn’t
* Content: Rewrite the sentences using the words in brackets.
* Products: Students’ full sentences on the board.
* Organization:

- T - Ss, Ss – Ss * Rewrite the sentences using the words in

brackets.
- T asks students work indepently. 1. There are some chairs and a table in the
.- SS sewrite the sentences using the words kitchen.
in brackets. We have………………………………….
- Ss complete the sentences in the book. .
- Teacher invites some students to complete 2. Not many people can understand his lecture.
on the board .  Only…………………………………….
- T comments and give marks. ( some / a few people can understand his
lecture)
3.It is wrong of us to throw rubbish.
GV: Phuong Mai –Lesson Plan English 6 149
We mustn’t …………………………..
4.It is necessary for us to be present at the class
discussion on Saturday.
 We must ……………………………..
5.The tour guide tells us not to throw rubbish.
 The tour guide says that
we………………… .
4. Project (5’) *
* Aims: To allow students to apply what they have learnt (vocabulary and grammar) into
practice through a project.
* Content: PROJECT: DREAM DESTINATION
* Products: Students’ perfect project.
* Organization:

Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content

* PROJECT: DREAM DESTINATION
T - Ss, Ss – Ss 1. In groups, make a poster about a natural
wonder you would like to visit. In the poster,
- Teacher sets the context: draw / print a picture of the place. Then give
+ Teacher will be a tourist who is looking for some information about the place:
a dream destination to go on holiday. • what the natural wonder is
+ Students will be the travel agents who have • where it is
to suggest the tourist by providing their • how you can go there
travel brochure (poster). • what it is special about
- Teacher divides the class into groups of 6. • what you can do there
Each group will act as a travel agency. …
- Teacher asks “the travel agencies” to 2. Introduce the attraction to your class
discuss and choose an interesting place
they would like to visit (in Viet Nam or in
the world).
- Teacher asks them to look for necessary
information for the visit, basically by
discussing the suggested questions.
-
- Students summarise the information and
design A0 size posters about the places
they would like to promote.
- Teacher asks the class to listen to the
reports and ask questions if they would like
to.
- Students will critically evaluate all the
posters, then give 1 vote for the most
attractive poster/ place.
Teacher gives comments and feedback to all
groups and awards special prize the group
which has the most votes
* Consolidation (2’)
* Aim: To consolidate what students have learnt in the lesson.
* Content: summarize the content of the lesson.
* Products: A student says the lesson’s content aloud.
GV: Phuong Mai –Lesson Plan English 6 150
* Organization:

Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content

- Teacher asks students to talk about what - revise vocabulary and grammar in unit 5
they have learnt in the lesson. - make Project: “DREAM DESTINATION ”
”
* Homework (2’)
Aim: To revise the knowledge that students have gained in Unit 5 and To prepare for the next
lesson
* Content: Review the lesson and prepare for the next lesson and do exersie in the workbbook
* Products: Students’ textbook and workbook.
* Organization:

Teacher’s and Ss’ activities Content

- Teacher asks students to revise old lesson - Complete the project
and to do exercise in workbook. - Prepare for the next lesson: Unit 6 ( Getting
- Teacher asks students to complete the started)
poject and prepare the new lesson.

Planning date:
Week: UNIT 6: OUR TET HOLIDAY
Period: Lesson 1: Getting started - Happy New Year!

I. OBJECTIVES:
By the end of the lesson, students will be able to use the lexical items related to “Tet” and use the
vocabulary and structures to describe things and activities at Tet.
II. LANGUAGE ANALYSIS
1. Knowledge:
* Vocabulary: Things and activities at Tet
* Grammar: Use should/shouldn’t for advice.
2. Skills: Listening and reading
3. Attitude: : To teach SS to work hard and love our Tet holiday.
4. Competences: Talking about how to prepare for Tet; Ss will be developed listening,
speaking and co-operating skills.
II. MATERIALS
- Grade 6 textbook, Unit 6, Getting started
- Projector/ pictures and cards
- sachmem.vn
IV. PROCEDURES : (STAGES)
1. Warm-up (5’)
- * Aim: To set the context for the listening and reading text.
To introduce the topic of the unit.
* Content: Network – say activities about at tet
* Products: Say activities about at tet aloud (individual work)
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
* Warm up: Network
T – SS ( Individual work)
- Teacher writes the word TET on the board and
ask students to give any words relating to the TET

GV: Phuong Mai –Lesson Plan English 6 151

topic.
- Teacher may allow students to give a Vietnamese - decorate houses
word and asks other students in the class if they - eat special food
know the equivalent in English. - new clothes
- Teacher writes on the corner of the board a list of - get lucky money
the words which students cannot translate into - visit relatives
English and asks them to keep a record for later ………
reference when the unit finishes.
- Teacher lets students open their books and starts
the lesson. 1. What are there in the picture?
2. What do you think about when talking about
+ Lead in Tet?
- Teacher draws students’ attention to the picture in * Suggested answers:
the textbook and asks them questions about the 1. There is a peach blossom / cherry blossom
picture: tree with red envelopes.
2. Lucky money, new clothes,…
2. Presentation (5’)
* Pre teach vocabulary

* Aim: to introduce new vocabulary

* Content: learn some vocabularies related to the topic.
* Products: Students read and understand the meaning of vocab.
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
* Pre teach vocabulary
- T - Ss. * Vocabulary
- Teacher use different techniques to teach - celebrate (v) : kỉ niệm
vocab (pictures, situation, realia) - decorate (v) : trang trí
- Follow the seven steps of teaching vacab. - family gathering (N. phr.): sum họp gia đình
- Repeat in chorus and individually - lucky money (N. phr.): tiền lì xì
- peach flowers (n) : hoa đào
- Copy all the words
* Checking vocab: < Rub out and remember>

3. Practice: (20’)

Task 1 (5’)

* Aims: To help students get the main idea of the text.

To help students scan the text for the information to fill the blanks.
* Content: Listen and read the dialouge
* Products: Students read and understand the meaning of the dialogue.
Students know how to role play
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
Task 1: T-Ss, Ss-Ss Task 1. Listen and read
- Teacher asks students to look at the title of the 1. What do you think they are talking about?
conversation and the picture. 2. When is Tet?
- Teacher asks students some brainstorming 3. Is it a holiday?
questions like: 4. What do we do at Tet?
- Teacher encourages students to give their Suggested answers:
GV: Phuong Mai –Lesson Plan English 6 152
answers, but does not confirm whether their 1. They are talking about Tet/ New Year.
answers are right or wrong. 2. It’s in January/ February.
- Teacher plays the recording twice for students 3. Yes, it is.
to listen and read along. 4. We clean our houses, decorate them, meet
- Teacher has students underline the words that relatives,…
are related to the topic of the unit while they
are listening and reading.
- Teacher invites some pairs of students to read * Role play.
the dialogue aloud.
- Teacher has students say the words in the text
that they think are related to the topic Tet.
- Teacher quickly writes the words on one part
of the board.

Task 2 (3’)
* Aims: To help Ss get the main idea of the text.
* Content: Choose the correct key : What are Linda and Phong talking about?
* Products: Students say correct key aloud .
* Organization:

Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content

Task 2: T-Ss, Ss-Ss Task 2. What are Linda and Phong talking
- Teacher asks students what exactly Phong and about? (p. 59)
Linda are talking about.
- Teacher lets them read the three options * Answer key: B
carefully and see the difference among them.
- Teacher confirms the correct answer. (They
are talking about Tet in Viet Nam.)

Task 3:(5’)
* Aims: To help Ss scan the text for the information to fill the blanks.
* Content: Complete the sentences about Tet
* Products: Students’ correct answer on the board.
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
Task 3: T-Ss, Ss-Ss Task 3: Complete the sentences about Tet with
- Teacher asks students to work independently the information from the conversation in 1.
to fill each blank with the word(s) from the .
conversation. * Answer key:
-Teacher may instruct them how to do the 1. January 2. houses
exercise and model with the first sentence 3. gatherings
- Allow Ss to share answers before discussing 4. lucky money 5. break
as a class. Write the correct answers on the
board.

Task 4: (5’)
* Aims: To develop Ss' knowledge of the vocabulary relating to Tet.
* Content: Match the words/ phrases in the box with the pictures.
* Products: Students match the words and pictures exactly on the board.
* Organization:

GV: Phuong Mai –Lesson Plan English 6 153

Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
Task 4: T-Ss, Ss-Ss Task 4: Match the words/ phrases in the box
with the pictures.
- Teacher lets students look at the pictures first * Answer key:
to see if they know the English words for them. 1. b 2. a 3. c 4. d
- Teacher then allows students to read the
words / phrases in the box and do the
matching.
- Teacher checks the answers as a class.

4. Production:(5’)
* Aims: To allow students’ opportunities to recognize what is related to Tet through a fun game.
* Content: Game – Is it about Tet?
* Products: Students pratise in groups.
* Organization:

Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content

Task 5 :T-Ss, Ss-Ss Task 5: Game – Is it about Tet? (p. 59)
- Teacher allows students some time to read the Example 1:
instruction and the example.
- Teacher demonstrates the game by saying a
word/ phrase aloud and ask students if it’s
about Tet or not.
- Teacher lets students write down two things/ Student: banh chung
activities. Class: It’s about Tet.
- Teacher goes round and helps if needed.
- Teacher divides the class into 2 or 4 teams Student: flying a kite.
and lets them compete each other. The teams Class: It’s not about Tet.
can play Rock – Paper – Scissors to decide
which team goes first.
Which team gets more correct words is the
winner.

3. Consolidation (3’)
* Aim: To consolidate what students have learnt in the lesson.
* Content:.summarize the content of the lesson.
* Products: Say aloud some words they remember from the lesson.
* Organization:

Teacher’s and Ss’ activities Content

- Teacher asks students to talk about what they - Some new words
have learnt in the lesson. - Read and understand content of the conversation
- Ss work indepently
4. Homework (2’)
* Aim: To revise the lesson and prepare for the next lesson.
* Content: Review the lesson and prepare for the next lesson ( A closer look 1)
* Products: Students’ textbook and workbook
* Organization
Teacher’s and Ss’ activities Content
- T reminds Ss to do homework and prepare the - Learn by heart all the new words.
GV: Phuong Mai –Lesson Plan English 6 154
new lesson. - Read the dialogue again.
- Prepare lesson 2 ( A closer look 1).

Planning date:
Week: UNIT 6: OUR TET HOLIDAY
Period: Lesson 2: A closer look 1

I. OBJECTIVES:
By the end of the lesson, students will be able to:
- extend and practice vocabulary related to "Tet": things, activities and practices;
- pronounce and recognize the sounds /s/ and /∫/.
II. LANGUAGE ANALYSIS
1. Knowledge:
* Vocabulary: Things and activities at Tet
* Grammar: Use should/shouldn’t for advice.
2. Skills: Listening , speaking and reading
3. Attitude: : To teach SS to work hard and love our Tet holiday.
4. Competences: Know pronounce and recognize the sounds /s/ and /∫/. how to ; Ss will be
developed listening, speaking .
III. MATERIALS
* Preparation:
1. Teacher: Text books , pictures, planning , …
- Grade 6 textbook, Unit 6, A closer look 1
- Smart TV/Pictures, sets of word cards
- sachmem.vn
2. Students: Text books, notebooks, posters, ….
IV. PROCEDURES : (STAGES)
* Warm-up (5’)
* Aim: To activate students’ prior knowledge and vocabulary related to the topic, the targeted
vocabularies and its pronunciation
* Content: Game: NETWORK ( write things for Tet)
* Products: Students write correct answers on the board. (team work)

GV: Phuong Mai –Lesson Plan English 6 155

* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
- T - Ss * Game: NETWORK

- Teacher divides the class into two teams, then

writes the topic “Tet holiday” on the board and
gives them two minutes to discuss. Things for Tet
- After that time, a student from each team one
by one runs to the board and writes one word.
- The team which has more correct answers is
the winner. * Suggested answer:
- Flowers
- great food
- house decoration
- new clothes.....
2. Presentation (7’)
(Vocab- pre-teach)
* Aim: To enrich students’ vocabulary with the topic “Tet”
* Content: Some vocabularies about Tet
* Products: Read and understand the meaning of vocab.
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
- T - Ss * Vocabulary
* Pre teach vocabulary - visit relatives: thăm họ hang bà con
- Teacher use different techniques to teach - watch fireworks : xem pháo hoa
vocab (pictures, situation, explaination …..) - give lucky money : nhận tiền lì xì
- Repeat in chorus and individually - make a wish: làm điều ước
- Copy all the words - clean the furniture : lau chùi đồ đạc
* Checking vocab: < What and where> -
2. Practice (10’)
Task 1: (5’)
* Aims: To revise/ teach the words/ phrases related to Tet.
* Content: Write the words/phrases in the box under the pictures.
* Products: Ss say the correct answer.
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
Task 1: T-Ss Task 1: Write the words/phrases in the box under
- Allow Ss to look at the pictures and see the pictures.
if they know the words I phrases in the * Answer key
box. 1 fireworks
- Ask them to write the words I phrases in 2. special food
the box under the pictures. 3. fun
Check the answers as a class. 4. wish
5. furniture
Task 2: (5’)
* Aims: To teach students how to combine a verb with a noun to talk about Tet activities.
* Content: Match the verbs with the nouns.
* Products: Ss say the correct answers ( pair work)
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
Task 2: T - Ss, Ss - Ss Task 2: Match the verbs with the nouns.
GV: Phuong Mai –Lesson Plan English 6 156
- Explain to Ss that some verbs and nouns
go together and some don't: *Answer key:
e.g. plant / decorate +a tree, 1. f (have fun)
but not cook+ a tree. 2. e (visit relatives)
- Write a verb on the board 3. d (give lucky money)
(e.g. read) 4. a (make a wish)
and ask Ss to match the verb with as many 5. c (clean the furniture)
nouns as they can find 6. b (watch fireworks)
- Ask Ss to look at the verbs in the Verbs
box first and see what nouns in the
Nouns box they can go with.
- Allow Ss to do the matching
independently.Then pair Ss and allow
them to share with their partner.
Check the answers as a class.
Practice
Task 3: (5’)
* Aims: To revise the words learnt in context.
* Content: Complete the sentences with the words in the box.
* Products: Ss read their correct sentences aloud .
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
Task 3:T-Ss, Ss-Ss Task 3: Complete the sentences with the words in
-Teacher asks students to work the box. (p. 60)
independently or in pairs. * Answer key:
- Teacher encourages them to read the 1. celebrate
sentences carefully and look for clues so that 2. peach
they can choose the right word to complete 3. clean
each sentence. 4. shopping
E.g. In sentence 1, we need a verb after 5. food
the subject we. We have two verbs in the box,
clean and celebrate. Only celebrate can go
with Tet. So the correct word is celebrate.
- Teacher checks the answers as a class.
- Teacher may call on some students to read
the sentences aloud.
* PRONUNCIATION
(Pre-teach the sounds /s/ and /∫/
* Aims: To help students to identify how to pronounce the sounds /s/ and /∫/
* Content: PRONUNCIATION : Sounds /s/ and /∫/
* Products: Read and know how to pronounce the sounds /s/ and /∫/.
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
Task 4:T-Ss, Ss-Ss
- Teacher introduces 2 sounds /s/ and /∫/ to PRONUNCIATION
students and lets them watch a video about * Sounds /s/ and /∫/
how to pronounce these two sounds. * Suggested answers:
- Teacher asks students to give some words /s/: see, sun, say, swim,…
containing these sounds. /∫/: show, should, shower, wash,…

* Practice
GV: Phuong Mai –Lesson Plan English 6 157
Task 4:(5’)
* Aims: To help students identify how to pronounce the sounds /s/ and /∫/ and practise pronouncing
these sounds in words.
* Content: Listen and repeat the words
* Products: Students pronounce words exactly.
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
Task 4 :T-Ss, Task 4: Listen and repeat the words. (p. 60)
- Teacher may write two Vietnamese words
on the board first, e.g. xách and sách. *Audio script:
- Teacher asks students to say the words
aloud and draw their attention to the shopping special
difference in the pronunciation of x and s. spring wish
- Teacher writes the words see and she under rice celebrate
the words xách and sách and read aloud the
four words.
- Teacher lets students elicit the difference in
the two sounds /s/ and /∫/ in English.
- Teacher has some students read out the
words first. Then play the recording and
ask students to listen and repeat.
- Teacher plays the recording as many times
as necessary.
- Teacher calls on some students to check.
Task 5: (5’)
* Aims: To help students pronounce the sounds /s/ and /∫/ correctly in context.
* Content: Listen and repeat the poem. Pay attention to the sounds /s/ and /ʃ/ in the underlined
words.
* Products: Whole class practice reading the poem exactly.
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’ activities Content
Task 5 :T-Ss, Task 5: Listen and repeat the poem. Pay attention
to the sounds /s/ and /ʃ/ in the underlined words.
- Teacher plays the recording for students to * Audio script:
listen to the poem. Then play the recording Spring is coming!
again for them to listen and repeat. Tet is coming!
- Teacher asks students some time to practise She sells peach flowers.
reading the poem among themselves. Her cheeks shine.
- Ask them to pay attention to the underlined Her eyes smile.
words with the /s/ and /∫/ sounds. Her smile is shy.
- Go around and correct pronunciation if She sells peach flowers
needed.
- Teacher asks for some volunteers to stand
up and read the poem aloud.
3. Production (5’)
* Aim: To give students chance to apply what they have learnt.
* Content: game - Sentence race
* Products: Students pratise in groups.
* Organization:

- Teacher divides the class into 4 big teams. * Game: Sentence race
GV: Phuong Mai –Lesson Plan English 6 158
- All the teams have to produce the longest * Suggested sentences:
sentence that contains the most /s/ and /∫/ The tongue twister: Seashells
sounds in 5 minutes. Then, each team takes - She sells sea shells by the sea shore.
turn to present their sentence, which team - The shells she sells are surely seashells.
has the longest sentence that has the - So if she sells shells on the seashore.
most /s/ and /∫/ sounds wins. - I'm sure she sells seashore shells.
4. Consolidation(3’)
* Aim: To consolidate what students have learnt in the lesson.
* Content: Vocab and how to pronounce the sounds /s/ and /∫/
* Products: Say aloud what they remember from the lesson.
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’ activities Content
- Teacher asks students to talk about what - Vocabulary and how to pronounce the /s/ and /∫/
they have learnt in the lesson
5. Homework (2’)
* Aim: To revise what they have learnt and prepare for the next lesson.
* Content: Review the lesson and prepare for the next lesson and do exersie in the workbbook
* Products: Students’ textbook and workbook
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’ activities Content
- T reminds Ss to do homework and prepare - Learn by heart all the new words.
the new lesson. - Find 5 new words that haven’t been mentioned in
the lesson with the sound /s/ and /∫/.
- Prepare lesson 3 ( A closer look 2)..
Planning date:
Week: UNIT 6: OUR TET HOLIDAY
Period: Lesson 3: A closer look 2

I. OBJECTIVES:
By the end of the lesson, students will be able to:
- use should and shouldn’t to make advice;
- use some and any to talk about quantity.
II. LANGUAGE ANALYSIS
1. Knowledge:
* Vocabulary: vocabulary related to Tet
* Grammar:should and shouldn’t ; some and any
2. Skills: Listening and reading
3. Attitude: : To teach SS to work hard and love our Tet holiday.
4. Competences: -giving advice.
III. MATERIALS
* Preparation:
1. Teacher: Text books , pictures, planning , …
- Grade 6 textbook, Unit 6, A closer look 2
- Smart TV/Pictures, sets of word cards
- sachmem.vn
2. Students: Text books, notebooks, posters, ….
IV. PROCEDURES: (STAGES)
* Warm-up (5’)
* Aim: To activate students’ prior knowledge and vocabulary related to the targeted grammar
and to increase students interest.
* Content: Game: Pelmanism ( words and the meaning of words.)
GV: Phuong Mai –Lesson Plan English 6 159
* Products: Students’ correct choice. (team work)
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
* Warm up (group work) * Game: Pelmanism
- T – Ss EX 1. Fireworks  8. Pháo hoa
- Teacher divides the class into 2 teams.
- Teacher put 12 sets of numbers, one includes
word and the meaning of words.
- Members from two teams choose the pair of
number .
- The group with the most correct word will be
the winner
- Lead in :
These are activities at Tet.
Today we are going to learn about the things we
should or shouldn’t do
1. Presentation 1 (10’)
* Aim: To teach some vocab related the lesson.
To introduce targeted grammar of “should / shouldn’t” and “some / any”.
* Content: Some vocab and grammar : Should / shouldn’t for advice
* Products: read and understand the meaning of words; know how to use Should / shouldn’t
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
* Pre – vocab * Vocabulary:
- T - Ss
- Teacher use different techniques to teach - behave (v): cư xử
vocab (pictures, situation, explaination …..) - plant (n, v): trồng cây, cây cảnh
- Repeat in chorus and individually - fight (v): đánh nhau
- Copy all the words - break (v): làm bể, làm vỡ

* Checking vocab: < Rub out and remmember>

* Pre –teach grammar
I. GRAMMAR 1:
+ Should / shouldn’t for advice
- T asks Ss to look at the picture and 1. Model sentences:
comment. - Nam, you shouldn’t wet the floor.
- T set the scene. - You should take your raincoat off first.
- T writes the sentences on the board. answers * Note:
on the board. - Form: should(n’t) + bare-inf..
- T checks the meaning, use and form of the - Meaning: should: nên, shouldn’t : không nên
structure - Use: express advice
Practice
Task 1 (5 ’)
* Aims: To give students more opportunities to practise the use of should / shouldn’t in real
context.
* Content: Look at the signs at the library and complete the sentences with should or shouldn’t.
* Products: Students say the correct answers aloud.
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
Task 1:T –Ss : Task 1: Look at the signs at the library and
GV: Phuong Mai –Lesson Plan English 6 160
- Teacher writes the word LIBRARY on the complete the sentences with should or
board and asks students to say what they shouldn’t. (p. 61)
should/ shouldn’t do when they are in a * Answer key:
library. 1. should
- Teacher then asks students to look at the 2. shouldn’t
four signs in the library and lets them 3. should
complete the sentences. 4. shouldn’t
- Teacher asks them to swap their answers
with a partner.
- Teacher calls students to read aloud the
sentences and checks their answers as a
class.
- If there is still time, teacher asks students to We use should for things that are good to do.
refer to the notes of In the classroom on the We use shouldn’t for things that are not good to
board and practise saying the sentences do
with should/ shouldn’t.
- Teacher asks students to look at
Remember! box and allow them one minute
to memorise it.
Task 2 (5)’
* Aims: To help Ss see what activity is good / not good to be done at Tet.
* Content: Tick the activities children should do at Tet and cross the ones they shouldn’t.
* Products: Students tick in the textbook and share the partner.
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
Task 2:T –Ss : Task 2: Tick the activities children should do at
- Teacher asks students to look at the pictures Tet and cross the ones they shouldn’t.
and read the phrases under the pictures. Suggested answer:
- Teacher then ticks (it’s good) or cross (it’s 1.  2. × 3.  4. × 5.  6. 
not good) each picture. The pictures help 7. × 8. ×
make the meanings of the phrases clear.
- Teacher checks the answers as a class.
Task 3 (5’)
* Aims: To help Ss form sentences using should / shouldn't.
* Content: Look at the activities . Take turns to say what you think children should/ shouldn't do.
* Products: Ss play a game and say the correct sentences.
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
Task 3 :T –Ss ; Ss- Ss Task 3: Work in pairs. Look at the activities in
- This activity allows students to produce 2. Take turns to say what you think children
sentences with the target language of should / should/ shouldn't do.
shouldn’t, using the prompts in Task 2. * Playing game : Lucky number
- Teacher asks students to do the task by * Answer Key:
playing game: Lucky number. 1. Children should plant trees.
- T devides the class into 2 teams 2. Children shouldn't break things.
- Teacher prepares 7 numbers which includes 3. Children should go out with friends.
5 questions about their school, and 2 lucky 4-. Children should make a wish.
numbers. 5. Children shouldn't fight.
- Each team takes turns and chooses a 6. Children should help with housework.
number and answers the question behind
the number. If the team answers the
GV: Phuong Mai –Lesson Plan English 6 161
question correctly, they will get 1 point. If
the team chooses the lucky number, they
get 1 point without answering the question
and may choose another number.
Presentation.
GRAMMAR 2.
* Aims: To introduce targeted grammar of “some / any”.
* Content: Grammar: Some / any for amount
* Products:. Undertand and know how to use some/ any
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content

* T-Ss,
* Some / any for amount
* Pre –teach grammar * Some/ any : một vài, một ít
- Ask Ss to read the Remember! box. 1. Model sentences:
- Tell them to pay attention to the phrases (+) My mother bought some fruits.
in bold in the sentences to see how some (+) I need some milk for the cake.
and any are used differently (positive, (-) I can’t answer any questions.
negative, and question). (?) Do you have any sugar?
- Remind them that some and any can be
used with bothcountable/ uncountable * Note:
nouns. When they go with countable - Some : Dùng trong câu khẳng định.
nouns, the nouns are always in plural. - Any : Dùng trong câu phủ định và câu hỏi.
* Ngoại lệ câu mời : Would you like some tea?
Practice 2
Task 4 ( 5’)
* Aims: To give Ss some controlled practice on the use of some / any.
* Content: Complete the sentences with some and any.
* Products: Students’ correct answers.
* Organization:
- Teacher applies the rules in the box. Content
Task 4: Complete the sentences with some and
- Teacher asks students to look for clues any.
(+ or - / ? sentences) and decides whether to * Answer key:
use some or any. 1. some, some
- Check their answers as a class and 2. any, any
explain the choice. 3. any, some
Production
Task 4 ( 5’)
* Aims: To give students much freer practice with some/ any in real context.
* Content: Game – What’s there in the fridge?
* Products: Students say the correct sentences aloud.
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’ activities Content
Task 5: Game – What’s there in the fridge?
- Teacher divides the class into 4 groups.
- Teacher asks students to look at the fridge * Suggested answers:
and read the example. 1. There are some eggs (in the fridge).
- Teacher draws students’ attention to the 2. There is some fruit juice.
change of the verb be in the use with some There are some packs of fruit juice.

GV: Phuong Mai –Lesson Plan English 6 162

or any (in the examples). 3. There are not any apples.
-Teacher reads out loud the things in the 4. There is not any bread.
fridge, and also the things that aren’t in the 5. There are some bananas.
fridge (to practice negative form). 6. There is some cheese
- The team which raise their hands the fastest
will get the chance to answer.
- Each correct answer gets 10 points.
 The team with the most points in the
winner
Consolidation (3’):
* Aim: To consolidate what students have learnt in the lesson.
* Content: summarize the main content in the lesson.
* Products: Ss say what students have learnt in the lesson.
* Organization:
Teacher asks students to talk about what they * Grammar:
have learnt in the lesson. + Should / shouldn’t for advice
+ Some / any for amount
4. Homework (2’)
* Aim: To revise the knowledge that students have gained in this lesson and prepare the new
lesson
* Content: Review the lesson and prepare for the next lesson and do exersie in the workbbook
* Products: Students’ textbook and workbook
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’ activities Content
- T reminds Ss to do homework and prepare - Do exercises in the workbook.
the new lesson. - Prepare lesson 4 ( communication)
Planning date:
Week: UNIT 6: OUR TET HOLIDAY
Period: Lesson 4 : Communication

I. OBJECTIVES:
By the end of the lesson, students will be able to:
- introduce New Year’s wishes;
- introduce students to some New Year’s practices in other countries.
II. LANGUAGE ANALYSIS
* Vocabulary: vocabulary related to Tet.
* Grammar: Saying New Year's wishes.
2. Skills: Speaking and reading
3. Attitude: : To teach SS to work hard and love our Tet holiday
4. Competences : develop reading, speaking and co-operating skills. summarizing , know how to
say New Year's wishes to your friends,…..
III. MATERIALS
* Preparation:
1. Teacher: Text books , pictures, planning , …
- Grade 6 textbook, Unit 6, communication
- Smart TV/Pictures, sets of word cards
- sachmem.vn
2. Students: Text books, notebooks, posters, ….
IV. PROCEDURES : (STAGES)
1.Warm-up (5’)
* Aim: To introduce the topic.

GV: Phuong Mai –Lesson Plan English 6 163

* Content: Game: Matching ( flags and the names of the countries).
- * Products: Ss match flags and know the names of the countries correctly .
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
* Warm up * Game: Matching
- T – Ss
- Teacher shows students the flags of five
A. Romania
countries and asks them if they know the 1.
names of the countries.
- Teacher divides the class into 2 teams. 2. B. Switzerland
- Teacher shows the flags of five countries and
the names of the countries
- Members from two teams take turns and match 3. C. Japan
the names with the correct pictures as fast as
possible.
- The team matched faster and correctly is the D .Thailand
winner. 4.

5. E. Spain

- Lead in: * Suggested answers:

- Teacher asks students how people in different 1- C ; 2- D ; 3- A; 4- E; 5- B.
countries celebrate their New Year.
- Teacher asks students how people wish others
on New Year holiday.
- Teacher sums up some common wishes.
2. Presentation ( 5’)
* EVERYDAY ENGLISH
Saying New Year’s wishes.

Task 1: (5’)
* Aim: 1. Presentation 1 (10’)
* Aim: To teach some vocab related the lesson.
To introduce New Year’s wishes.
* Content: Some vocab related to the lesson.
* Products: Read and understand the meaning of words.
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
* Pre- teach Vocab. * Vocabulary:
- T - Ss
- Teacher use different techniques to teach
vocab (pictures, situation, explaination …..)
- Repeat in chorus and individually
- Copy all the words

* Checking Vocab : Rub out and

GV: Phuong Mai –Lesson Plan English 6 164

remmember

Task 1 Task 1: Listen and read the New Year’s wish.

- Teacher turns on the audio, students listen
and read the New Year’s wish. + Wishing you joy & laughter...from January to
 Students come up with the patterns: December!
* Note:
Teacher asks students can they add some Wishing you/ I wish you + noun/ noun phrase.
more wishes.
* Some common wishes on New Year holiday,
- Happy New Year
- Wish you healthy and successful .
- Best wishes for the new year.

3. Practice (20’)
Task 2: (5’)
* Aims: To practice saying New Year’s wishes.
* Content: Practise saying New Year’s wishes to your friends
* Products: some students say the wishes aloud. In front of the class.

* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
Task 2:T –Ss : Ss- Ss Task 2: Practise saying New Year’s wishes to your
- Students work in groups and say New friends, using the suggestions below or creating
Year’s wishes. your own.
- Teacher calls on some students to say the * Suggested answer.
wishes aloud. -I wish / Wishing you happy days all the year round.
- I wish / Wishing you good health and happiness.
- I wish / Wishing you success in your work and a
happy New Year.
- I wish / Wishing you success in your study and
laughter all the year round.
- I wish / Wishing you a year full of joy and success.
-I wish / Wishing you love and care from everybody
around you.

4. Pre – reading (5’)

* NEW YEAR PRACTICES IN THE WORLD
* Aims: Introduce some New Year’s practices to students.
* Content: Match the sentences with the pictures. Then match them with the countries
* Products: Students’correct answers on the board.
* Organization:

Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content

Task 3: T – Ss Task 3: Match the sentences with the pictures.
- Teacher lets students read sentences first. Then match them with the countries.
- Teacher explains new words if they * Answer key:
don’t know. (hole, throw water)
- Teacher asks students to look at the 1 - b- the USA
pictures and do the matching. 2 - c - the Russia
GV: Phuong Mai –Lesson Plan English 6 165
- Teacher checks their answers as a class. 3 - a - Japan
- Teacher then moves on to the next part, 4 - d - Thailand
asks students if they know which
country each practice is from.
- Teacher asks students to look at the
names of the countries and do the
matching.
- Teacher checks answer as a class.
While-Reading (8’)
Task 4:(5’)
* Aims: To help students have knowledge about a travel guide.
* Content: Read how people in different countries celebrate their New Year. Then match the
countries with the activities.
* Product: Students say the correct answer key .
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
Task 3: T – Ss. Task 4: Read how people in different countries
- Teacher allows students some time to celebrate their New Year. Then match the countries
read the New Year’s practices in five with the activities.
countries and do the matching.
- Teacher checks their answers as a class, => Answer:
asks students to read aloud the sentences 1- b 2- a 3- e 4- c 5- d
that support their answers.

6. Post-Reading
Task 5 (5’)
* Aims: To help Ss talk about New Year's practices around the world.
* Content: Each student chooses one activity and The group says which country he/ she is talking
about.
* Products: Student describe the activities exactly. ( group work)
* Organization:

Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content

Task 5: T - Ss, Ss – Ss Task 5: Work in groups. Each student chooses one
activity from 4. Take turns to say them aloud. The
- Teacher asks students to underline all the group says which country he/ she is talking about.
activities they find in the passages.  * Example:
Students memorize the key words to - They throw water on other people.
help them talk. - It's Thailand.
- Teacher calls on students and ask them 1/ They put 12 grapes in the mouth.
to describe the activities they have - It’s Spain.
chosen to the group. 2/ They ring bells 108 times.
- The group/ The class gives the name of - It’s Japan
the country. 3/ They throw coins into a river.
- It’s Romania.

5. Consolidation (3’)
* Aims: To consolidate what students have learnt in the lesson.
* Content: Summarize the content of the lesson
* Products: Ss say aloud what they have learnt .
* Organization:
GV: Phuong Mai –Lesson Plan English 6 166
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
Teacher asks students to talk about what - vocabulary related to Tet
they have learnt in the lesson. - saying New Year’s wishes.

6. Homework (2’)
* Aim: To revise the knowledge that students have gained in this lesson. And prepare for the next
lesson: Skills 1.
* Content: Revise the lesson and prepare for the next lesson and do exersie in the workbbook
* Products: Students’ textbook and workbook
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’ activities Content
- T reminds Ss to do homework and - Choose a New Year celebration in the world and find
prepare the new lesson. out the information about it.
- To prepare for the next lesson: Unit 6 Skills 1.

Planning date:
Week: UNIT 6: OUR TET HOLIDAY
Period: Lesson 5 : Skills 1

I. OBJECTIVES:
By the end of the lesson, students will be able to:
- develop reading skill for specific information;
- express judgement about what children should/shouldn’t do at Tet.
II. LANGUAGE ANALYSIS
1. Knowledge:
* Vocabulary: lexical items related to the lesson.
* Grammar: should /shouldn’t + V
2. Skills: Reading and speaking
3. Attitude: To teach SS to work hard and love Tet holiday; undestand something should
/shouldn’t do at Tet holiday.
4. Competences: develop reading, speaking and co-operating skills; Talk about activities at Tet.
III. MATERIALS
* Preparation:
1. Teacher: Text books , pictures, planning , …
- Grade 6 textbook, Unit 5, skills 1
- Smart TV/Pictures, sets of word cards
- sachmem.vn
2. Students: Text books, notebooks, posters, ….

GV: Phuong Mai –Lesson Plan English 6 167

IV. PROCEDURES : (STAGES)
1. Warm-up (5’)
* Aim: To help students be excited in class.
To revise the old knowledge.
* Content: Listen an English song ; matching contries with their activities.
* Products: Students say the answers correctly.
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
- T- Ss:. * Warm-up : Listen an English song
- Have SS listen an EL song * Matching
Countries Activities
- Teacher divides the class into 2 teams.
- Teacher asks Ss match the names of 1. Japan a. put 12 grapes in the mouth
countries with theactivities. 2. Spain b. ring bells 108 times
- . Members from two teams take turns and 3. Switzerland c. throw coins into a river
matchs the names with the correct activites 4. Romania d. throw water on other people
as fast as possible. The team matched faster 5. Thailand e. drop ice cream on the floor
and correctly is the winner. 1 – b: 2 – a: 3 – e: 4 – c: 5 – d:

2. Pre- reading (7’)

Pre – teach vocab
* Aim: To provide students with some lexical items before reading the text.
To let students find out the meanings of these lexical items themselves based on provided context.
* Content: Learn some vocab related the topic.
* Products: Read and understand the meaning of words.
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
T –Ss : * VOCABULARY
- Pre teach vocabulary - cheer (v) : reo hò
- Teacher use different techniques to teach - strike midnight (v) : điểm nữa đêm
vocab (pictures, situation, explaination…..) - light up (phrv) :chiếu sáng
- Repeat in chorus and individually - custom (n) : phong tục
- Copy all the words - enough (determiner) : đủ
- salt (n): muối
- cry sound (phrn): tiếng khóc, tiếng kêu
- poor (adj): nghèo
* Checking vocab: *Checking: What and where
Pre- reading (5’)
* Aims: To introduce the topic of reading.
* Content: chatting ( some questions)
* Products: Ss anwer the questions correctly.
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
T –Ss *Children in different countries are talking about
- T has look at the pictures and asks Ss their New Year.
some questions. 1. What is his/ her name?
- T asks Ss match 3 names of children with 2. Where is he/ she from?
3 pictures of countries. * Matching: Name with pictures
- And then lead in reading part.
While – reading (10’)
* Aims: To develop reading skill for specific information.
GV: Phuong Mai –Lesson Plan English 6 168
To help Ss broaden and deepen their knowledge about New Years.
* Content: Read the passages and decide who says sentences 1 – 5.
* Products: Ss say the correct answers aloud.
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
Task 1:T –Ss Task 1:Read the passages and decide who says
- Teacher reminds students on how to scan a sentences 1 – 5. (p. 64)
text. * Scanning:
- Teacher asks students to work 1. Know what you are looking for. (read the questions
individually. and underline key words in each question)
- After the time is over, teacher asks 2. Identify the key words in text and move quickly
students to compare their answers 3. Read the rest of the text. (when you find key words,
together, and discuss with each other if read the surrounding words to check your answers)
they don’t have the same answers. * Answer key:
- Teacher checks the answers in the whole 1. C 2. A 3. B 4. C 5. D
class and asks for students’ explanation.
Task 2(5’)
* Aims: To check students’ reading comprehension.
* Content: Test your memory – grab the words game.
* Products: Work in groups and give the correct answers.
* Organization :
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
T –Ss Task 2
- This job can be done ideally by asking * Test your memory – grab the words game.
Ss not to look back at the passages and
see how many questions they answer + The things appear in the passages: a, b, c, e, f, g
correctly. + The things don't appear in the passages: d, h
- T may turn it into a competition
between groups. Then have them refer
to the passages and check their answers.
- Check their answers as a class.
5. post -reading (5’)
* Aims: To check students’ reading comprehension
* Content: : Answer some questions: GAME: LUCKY NUMBER
* Products: Answer the questionss exactly by playing game,.
* Organization :
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
Task 3: T - Ss, Ss – Ss EX: Answer some questions:
- T asks Ss to answer some questions by GAME: LUCKY NUMBER
playing game : lucky number 1.Who does Russ often go to Times Square to welcome
the New Year?
- Class is divided into 2 groups. 2. What do everybody do when the clock strikes
- Teacher prepares 8 numbers which midnight in the USA?
includes 6 questions about their school, 3. What does Wu do On New Year’s Day?
and 2 lucky numbers. 4. Does Wu go out and have a day full of fun ?
- Each team takes turns and chooses a 5. Where does Mai learn some customs about Tet from?
number and answers the question behind 6. Are cats lucky animals in Viet Nam?
the number If the team answers the * Answer key:
question correctly, they will get 1 point. 1. with his parents .
- If the team chooses the lucky number, they 2. Everybody cheers and sings.
get 1 point without answering the question 3. dress beautifully and go to his grandparents’
GV: Phuong Mai –Lesson Plan English 6 169
and may choose another number. houses.
-The team which has more points will be 4. Yes, he does..
the winner. 5. Her parents.
6. No. they aren’t . (Dogs are lucky animals.)
Pre –speaking (5’)
Task 3
* Aims: To help Ss talk about what they have read.
* Content: discuss what they do/ don't do during Tet.
* Products: Students write (or say) the perfect sentences on the board.
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
Task 3: T - Ss, Ss – Ss Task 3: Work in groups. These are some activities
- Ask Ss to work in groups to discuss from the reading passages in 1. Tell your group if
what they do/ don't do during Tet. you do them during Tet.
- Call on some Ss to report the results of * Example:
their group to the class. - I always watch fireworks on New Year's Eve.
- Encourage Ss to extract more activities - I don’t sing when the New Year comes.
from the passages in 1 than the ones - I always get lucky money at Tet.
listed in 3, or provide more activities and - I usually go out and have fun with my friends.
see if Ss do t hem . - I always dress beautifully at Tet.
6. While –Speaking (5’)
* DISCUSSION
Task 4
* Aims: To help Ss express their own ideas on what children should / shouldn 't do at Tet.
* Content: Read the list and discuss what you should or shouldn’t do at Tet
* Products: Students’ idea on the posters and discuss in groups.
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
T - Ss, Ss – Ss Task 4: Work in groups. Read the list and discuss
- Teacher draws students’ attention to the what you should or shouldn’t do at Tet.
example provied, and asks 2 students to - break things - play games all night
model the conversation. - make a wish - invite friends home
- Teacher tells students that to form an - dress beautifully - ask for lucky money
opinion using should/ shouldn’t, students - say "Have fun!" to friends - play loud music
have to decide whether each activity is - help decorate our houses
good.
- Teacher asks students to work in groups of Example:
A: We should dress beautifully at Tet.
4 to talk in their groups and encourages
B: I agree. Should we ask for lucky money?
them to use the languages from the
C: No, we shouldn't.
example.
- Teacher goes around the class and offers
A: We should help decorate our houses.
help if needed.
B: I agree. Should we play games all night?
-Teacher calls students to share their
C: No, we shouldn't.
opinions with the class.
7. Post-Speaking (3’)
* Aims: To provide students to use their own knowledge and the knowledge they have gained in the
lesson today to talk in groups in a less controlled way
* Content: Questions: “What the children in the USA should or shouldn’t do during the New Year?”
* Products: Students’ opinion are reported in front of the class
* Organization:

GV: Phuong Mai –Lesson Plan English 6 170

Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
- T - Ss, Ss – Ss * Questions:
- Teacher asks students whether they still - “What the children in the USA should or shouldn’t do
remember Russ from the USA, and asks during the New Year?”
Ss to discuss freely in pair:
- Teacher encourages students to freely
express their opinion.
- Teacher calls some students to report their
opinion to the whole class.
+ Note: There is no right or wrong for this
question. Students can make guesses based
on what they know.
7. Consolidation (2’)
* Aims: To consolidate what students have learnt in the lesson.
* Content: Ss summarize what they have learnt with the two skills.
* Products: Students say what they have learnt with the two skills in font of the class.
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
- Teacher asks students to talk about what - 2 skills ( Talk about what children do/ don't do or
they have learnt in the lesson. should/ shouldn't do at Tet)

8. Homework (2’)
* Aim: To revise the knowledge that students have gained in this lesson.
* Content: Review the lesson and prepare for the next lesson .
* Products: Students’ textbook and workbook
* Organization:
- Teacher asks students to prepare the new - Do Ex in WB
lesson - Prepare: Skills 2

Planning date:
Week: UNIT 6: OUR TET HOLIDAY
Period: Lesson 6: Skills 2

I. OBJECTIVES:
By the end of the lesson, students will be able to:
- listen for specific information about preparations for Tet;
- write an email about what people should/ shouldn’t do at Tet.
II. LANGUAGE ANALYSIS
1.Knowledge:
* Vocabulary: vocabulary related to Tet
* Grammar: Present simple, should/ shouldn't
2. Skills: Listening and writing (reading, speaking)
3. Attitude: To teach SS to work hard , love our Tet holiday; undestand something should
/shouldn’t do at Tet holiday.
4. Competences: Know how to use should/ shouldn’t ; Students will developed listening and
writing skills.
III. MATERIALS
* Preparation:
1. Teacher: Text books , pictures, planning , …
- Grade 6 textbook, Unit 6, Skills 2
- Smart TV/Pictures.
GV: Phuong Mai –Lesson Plan English 6 171
- sachmem.vn
2. Students: Text books, notebooks, posters, ….
IV. PROCEDURES : (STAGES)
* Warm-up (5’)
* Aim: - Check students’ knowledge related the previous lesson
- To introduce the topic of listening.
* Content: Watch a clip and write activities about Tet
* Products: Students' answers on the posters
* Organization
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
* Warm up ( Team work) * Memorising game:
T -Ss Watch a clip and write activities about Tet
- Teacher divides class into 2 teams.
- Teacher asks students to look at the TV, shows * suggested anwser:
the screen and asks them to memorise - watching fireworks - going to the pagoda
activities about Tet in the clip in 2 minutes. - buying flowers - gathering family
- buying new clothes - getting lucky money
- The team who write activities more correctly - making Chung cake - eating special food
is the winner. -…
- Ss write activities on the posters.
2. Pre -listening (5’)
* Aim: To help students brainstorm ideas about Tet preparation and introduces the topic of
listening.
* Content: Question about Tet preparation’
* Products: Students say answers correctly.
* Organization
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
- T asks Ss a question about preparing for * Question:
Tet. - How does your family prepare for Tet?
- Ss answer question individually
- T feedbacks and introduces the topic of * Suggested answers:
listening. S1: Buy new clothes
+Lead in: Clean the house
Now we are going to listen to Nguyen’s S2: Decorate the house
letter to his pen-friend – Tom about how his Cook chung cake.
family prepares for Tet. S3: ……………………….
2. While -listening (10’)
Task 1: (5’)
- * Aims: To help students develop listening skill for specific information.
- To help students develop listening skill for specific information (short-answer question).
- To help students combine listening and writing at the same time.
* Content: Listen and tick the things you hear (work individually)
* Products: Students tick answers correctly
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
Task 1:T –Ss : Ss- Ss ( individual work) Task 1: Listen and tick the things you hear.
- Teacher asks students to read aloud the list (p. 65)
of words, makes sure students produce
them correctly. This would help them * Answer key:
recognize the key words when they are old things, peach flowers, new clothes, wishes
doing the listening.
GV: Phuong Mai –Lesson Plan English 6 172
- Teacher plays the recording one or two
times (depending on students’ levels).
- Teacher lets students work individually.
- Teacher asks students to compare their
answers in pairs.
- Teacher checks the answers as a class.
Task 2 (7’)

* Aims: To help students develop listening skill for specific information (short-answer question).
- To help students combine listening and writing at the same time.
* Content: Listen again and answer the questions in one or two words by playing game : Who’s
faster ?
* Products: say ( write) the correct answers.
* Organization
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
Task 2: T - Ss, Ss - Ss Task 2: Listen again and answer the questions
- Have Ss read the questions first to in one or two words. (p. 65)
determine what information is needed to
answer the questions. Game: Lucky apple
- Remind them that only the key word(s)
is/are used for the answers.
- Play the recording. Have Ss listen and
write their answers by playing game:
- Who’s faster?
- Teacher prepares 7 numbers which
includes 5 questions in task 2, and 2 lucky
numbers.
- The student who raises his / her hand the
fastest gets to choose a number and answers
the question behind the number. If the * Suggested answer.
student answers the question correctly, they - Apple 1 : Q 2 – (Their) house
will get 1 point. If the team chooses the - Apple 2: Lucky apple
lucky apple, they get 1 point without - Apple 3: Q3 – Red
answering the question and may choose - Apple 4: Q1 – old things
another apple. - Apple 5: Lucky apple
- Have Ss copy down the answers. - Apple 6: Q4 – his father
- Apple 7: Q5 – anything
4. Post- listening (5’)
* Aims: To test students’ memory for the listening text in a creative way; to check students’
listening comprehension
* Content: Summarize the information of the listening part.
* Products: Students’ summarization about some main information of the listening part
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
Task 3:T-Ss, Ss-Ss( work group) * Summarize the information of the listening
- Students work in groups of four. part.
- Teacher asks students to summarize the
information in the listening part and talk AUDIO SCRIPT
about it. Tet is coming and I'm very happy. We do a lot
- Teacher helps if necessary. of things beforeTet. We throw some old things
away. We clean and decorate our homes. My
GV: Phuong Mai –Lesson Plan English 6 173
mother goes shopping and buys food, red
envelopes, and peach flowers. She also buys new
clothes for us.My father makes banh chung and
cooks them on an open fire. He says that I should
make some wishes at Tet, and I shouldn't break
anything. It brings bad luck.
5. Pre-Writing (5’)
* Aims: To help Ss brainstorm ideas for their email and to review Tet vocabulary.
* Content: list of four things that you think children should and shouldn’t do at Tet
* Products: Students’ answers on the posters.
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
Task 3: T - Ss, Ss – Ss ( work in groups) Task 3: Work in groups. Discuss and make a
- Teacher divides students into groups of list of four things that you think children
four to discuss and make a list of the should and shouldn’t do at Tet. (p. 65)
things they think children should/shouldn’t => Eg:
do at Tet. 1. Children should visit relatives with parents
- Teacher guides students to write short 2. Children should wear beautifful clothes
phrases/ notes instead of full sentences 3. Children shouldn't break things
here. 4. Children shouldn't play card all night
- Teacher walks around and observes ………………………………
students’ performances. If students come up
with any new activities or things, teacher
writes it on the board for other students to
see and discuss.
6. While-Writing (5’)
* Aim: To help students complete an email talking about what people should/ shouldn’t do at
Tet.
* Content: Complete the email
* Products: Students’ writing. (individual work)
* Organization
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
Task 4: T - Ss, Ss – Ss ( work individually) Task 4: Complete the email, using your ideas
- in 3. (p. 65)
- Teacher asks students to read what has Dear Tom,
been written in the incomplete email, and Tet is coming. I will tell you more about our Tet.
ask students to decide what will come in At Tet, we should visit relatives with parents. We
between the sentences. should, wear beautifful clothes too. But
- Teacher lets students do this task we shouldn't break things. We shouldn't play
individually. cards all night, either.
Teacher walks around the class and offers Please write and tell me about your New Year
help if needed. celebration.
Yours,
Nguyen
7. Post-Writing (3’)
* Aim: To cross check and final check students’ writing.
* Content:. Share your writing with the class
* Products: Students’s perfect writing
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’ activities Content

GV: Phuong Mai –Lesson Plan English 6 174

- Task 4: T - Ss, Ss – Ss
- Teacher asks students to exchange their Share your writing with the class
textbooks to check their friends’ writing.
- Teacher then calls one or two students to
share their writing with the class.
Teacher gives feedback.
* Consolidation (3’)
* Aim: To consolidate what students have learnt in the lesson.
* Content: talk about what they have learnt in the lesson.
* Products: Students’s answers.
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’ activities Content
- Teacher asks students to talk about what - Listen for specific information about
they have learnt in the lesson. preparations for Tet;
- Write an email about what people should/
shouldn’t do at Tet.
* Homework (2’)
- Aim: To revise the knowledge and rewrite their writing in the notebooks.
* Content: Review the lesson and prepare for the next lesson and do exersie in the workbbook
* Products: Students’ textbooks and workbooks
* Organization
- Teacher asks students to write down the Rewrite your writing.
paragraph in their notebooks. Do the exercises in workbook.
- Teacher asks students to prepare the new Prepare LOOKING BACK AND
lesson. PROJECT..

Planning date:
Week: UNIT 6: OUR TET HOLIDAY
Period: Lesson 7: Looking back and project

I. OBJECTIVES:
By the end of the lesson, students will be able to:
- review the vocabulary and grammar of Unit 6;
- apply what they have learnt (vocabulary and grammar) into practice through a project.
II. LANGUAGE ANALYSIS
1. Knowledge:
* Vocabulary: vocabulary related to Tet
* Grammar: should/ shouldn't + V
2. Skills: Reading, speaking and writing
3. Attitude: : To teach SS to work hard and undestand something should /shouldn’t do at Tet.
4. Competences: Ss will be developed speaking, writing and co-operating skills when doing
project.
III. MATERIALS
* Preparation:
GV: Phuong Mai –Lesson Plan English 6 175
1. Teacher: Text books , pictures, planning , …
- Grade 6 textbook, Unit 6, Looking back and project
- Smart TV/Pictures.
- sachmem.vn
2. Students: Text books, notebooks, posters, ….
IV. PROCEDURES : (STAGES)
* Check- up (5’)
* Aim: To revise the vocabulary related to the topic and lead in the next part of the lesson.
* Content: Look at the pictures and Write Activities you should do/ shouldn’t do at Tet
* Products: Students’ perfect sentences on the board.
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
* Warm up * Warm up : Look at the pictures and Write
- T –Ss ; Ss - Ss Activities you should do/ shouldn’t do at Tet
- Teacher divides the class into 2 big
groups. * Suggested answers:
Teacher asks students to ook at the pictures -You should cook Chung cake.
and Write Activities you should do/ - You shouldn’t eat a lot of sweets.
shouldn’t do at Tet - You should watch fireworks.
The group having the most suitable and ………………..
correct answers is the winner.

* VOCABULARY
Task 1,2 (10’)
* Aim: Task 1: To help students revise the vocabulary about things and activities at Tet.
Task 2: To help students revise the vocabulary about Tet in context.
* Content: Match the verbs on the left with the nouns on the right.
* Products: Ss say the correct answers key aloud.
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
Task 1: Task 1: Match the verbs on the left with the
- T –Ss : nouns on the right.
- Teacher encourages students to * Answer key:
complete the task individually. 1. D 2. C 3. E
- Students exchange their textbooks to 4. A 5. B 6. F
compare their answers together.
- Teacher gives feedback to the whole
class. Task 2: Complete the sentences with the
words/phrases in the box. (p. 66)
Task 2: * Answer key:
- T –Ss : 1. lucky money
- Teacher encourages students to 2. cleaning
complete the task individually. 3. Banh Chung
- Student exchange their textbooks to 4. peach
discuss the reasons why they are 5. gathering
choosing the appropriate
words/phrases.
- Teacher gives feedback as a class
discussion.

GV: Phuong Mai –Lesson Plan English 6 176

* GRAMMAR (10’)

Task 3+ Task 4
* Aims: Task 3- To help students revise the use of should/ shouldn’t in context; to let students
learn how to behave well at other people’s houses.
Task 4 - To help students revise the use of some/ any in context.
* Content: Tick () the things a child should do and cross (x) the things he/ she shouldn’t
when visiting someone’s house at Tet
* Products: students write the perfect sentences on the board.
* Organization:
Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content
- Task 3: T - Ss Task 3: Tick () the things a child should do
- Teacher highlights the new situation of and cross (x) the things he/ she shouldn’t when
visiting someone else’s house, a popular visiting someone’s house at Tet. Then write
activity for children at Tet. sentences using should/ shouldn’t. (p. 66)
- Teacher has students read the phrases * Suggested answers:
first, tick or crosses each one as they 1. He/she shouldn’t enter a room without asking
wish. for permission.
- Teacher lets students write the sentences 2. He/she should ask to use the toilet.
individually. 3. He/she should ask to take things for a shelf.
- Teacher calls on some students to say 4. He/she shouldn’t make a lot of noise.
the sentences aloud and sees if others 5. He/she should ask for some water if he/she feels
agree. thirsty.
- Teacher checks their answers as a class.
- Teacher asks if students can suggest any
other behaviours with should/shouldn’t.

Task4 : Task 4: Read the passage and fill the blanks

T - Ss, Ss – Ss with some or any. (p. 66)
- Students work individually.
- Teacher asks students to look for clues * Answer key:
in each sentence to decide which word to 1. some 2. Some 3. any
fill the blank. 4. any 5. Some 6. any
- Teacher asks students to swap their
answers and check.
- Teacher checks their answers as a class.

3 . Production(3’):
* Aims: To give Ss further practice on using should/ shouldn’t ; any /some…
* Content: Rewrite the sentences using the words in brackets.
* Products: Ss play game in groups and complete the correct sentences on the board.
* Organization:

- T - Ss, Ss – Ss * Rewrite the sentences using the words in

brackets.
- T divides the class into 2 teams. 1. It’s good if children help their parents with the
- SS sewrite the sentences using the words housework.
in brackets. → Children should…………………………
- Ss has Ss play a game : Lucky number 2. It’s not a good idea when you eat a lot of sweets
- Teacher prepares 6 numbers which and candies.
includes 4 questions about their school, → You shouldn’t………………………
GV: Phuong Mai –Lesson Plan English 6 177
and 2 lucky numbers. 3. I’m not happy when children lie to their
- Each team takes turns and chooses a parents.
number and Rewrite the sentences. → Children shouldn’t………………
- If the team writes correctly, they will 4. She doesn’t have any new books in the bag
get 1 point. If the team chooses the lucky → There
number, they get 1 point without ………………………………………….................
answering the question and may choose .
another number.
- T comments and give marks.

4. Project (5’) *
* Aims: To allow students to apply what they have learnt (vocabulary and grammar) into
practice through a project.
* Content: Make * PROJECT “I WISH”
* Products: Students’ project on the posters.
* Organization:

Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content

T - Ss, Ss – Ss * PROJECT
I WISH
- Teacher sets the context that Tet is
coming, and encourages students to
think about their wishes.
- Teacher asks students to get a small
piece of paper. (Paper in different
colours can give the tree a bright
atmosphere.)
- Teacher reminds students not to write
their names on the paper.
- Teacher draws students’ attention to * Example:
some wishes on the trees as examples. - I want to pass all of my exams.
- Teacher allows students - I want to have a new bike
3-5 minutes to write their wishes. - I want to make a lot of good friends.
- Teacher let students come up and hang
their wishes on the tree.
- - When everybody is ready, call on some
students to come and pick a random
piece of paper, and read the wish aloud.
The class can guess whose wish it is.
In the end, ask students to make a list of
wishes they are most interested in so that
they can share with their family when they
return home.
* Consolidation (2’)
* Aim: To consolidate what students have learnt in the lesson.
* Content: summarize the content of the lesson.
* Products: A student says the lesson’s content aloud.
* Organization:

Teacher’s and Ss’activities Content

- Teacher asks students to talk about what - revise vocabulary related to Tet
GV: Phuong Mai –Lesson Plan English 6 178
they have learnt in the lesson. - Grammar: should/ shouldn't + V

* Homework (2’)
Aim: To revise the knowledge that students have gained in Unit 6 and To prepare for the next
lesson
* Content: Review the lesson and prepare for the next lesson and do exersie in the workbbook
* Products: Students’ textbook and workbook.
* Organization:

Teacher’s and Ss’ activities Content

- Teacher asks students to revise old - Complete the project
lesson and to do exercise in workbook. - Write 5 sentences to tell about the most useful
- Teacher asks students to complete the things on Tet holiday
project and prepare the new lesson. - Prepare UNIT 7

GV: Phuong Mai –Lesson Plan English 6 179